JP7260196B1 - playground - Google Patents

Abstract

Kind Code: A1 A game machine, a game management device, and a game system that do not use medals are provided. game value number storage means for performing game value number storage means, game value number control means for performing a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and effect control means for controlling the effect performed by the effect means. , and the game value control means can execute counting processing including transmission processing of the game value number to the external processing device and game value update processing of subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the counting operation means. The game control means can set a first game state in which an auxiliary function that is advantageous to the player can be operated, and the effect control means can execute a counting effect in accordance with the counting process, and the auxiliary function The amount of increase in the number of game values per unit game in the first gaming state when following is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of game values per unit game due to the counting process. [Selection drawing] Fig. 1

Description

The present invention relates to amusement machines typified by pinball game machines (pachinko machines) and reel game machines (slot machines).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, some game machines require actual medals to play games (for example, Patent Literature 1).

JP 2017-176415 A

In conventional gaming machines, the use of medals has caused the problem of dishonesty, such as bringing in medals from other stores, in addition to the task of counting medals by staff members.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table, a game management device, and a game system that do not use medals.

In order to solve the above problems, the amusement machine of the present invention includes:
a throwing operation means;
a counting operation means;
a game control means for controlling the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means for storing a game value number related to the game value used in the game;
a game value control means for performing a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means for controlling the production performed by the production means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means executes a counting process including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the counting operation means. is a possible means,
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state in which an auxiliary function that is advantageous to the player can be operated,
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the counting operation means even in the first game state,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a counting production along with the counting process,
The amount of increase in the game value number per unit game in the first game state when the game is advanced according to the activated auxiliary function is greater than the amount of decrease in the game value number per unit game due to the counting process. small ,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a specific production,
The production control means is means for not executing the specific production during execution of the counting production,
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine, a game management device, and a game system that do not use medals.

1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 and a lending machine 700 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. It is a figure which shows the connection example of each board|substrate and each unit. 4 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 3 and the reel unit 109 similarly shown in FIG. 3. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram of a game system including the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. It is a table summarizing gaming machine state information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information. It is a figure which shows a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted to the medal|token number control part 350 from the game control part 302. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700; (a) is a diagram showing details of hall control/fraud monitoring information, and (b) is a list of error codes. It is a table showing game control state commands. FIG. 10 is a table showing medal count control state commands; FIG. It is a figure which shows a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted to the medal|token number control part 350 from the game control part 302. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the details of the game control priority command, and (b) is a diagram showing the details of the response command returned from the medal count control section 350 to the game control section 302. FIG. It is a figure which shows a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is transmitted to the medal|token number control part 350 from the game control part 302. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game control part main process. FIG. 16 is a flow chart of medal insertion/start lever acceptance processing (step S102) in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart of processing during medal insertion (step S1011) in FIG. 16. FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of settlement button processing (step S1102) in FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart of variation information transmission processing (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605) to the medal number control unit in FIGS. 17, 18 and 22; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of triple command transmission processing (step S1307) in FIG. 19; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart of priority command transmission processing (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) to the medal count control unit in FIGS. 16 and 20; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart of a medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 15; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of game control part timer interruption processing. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of disconnection determination processing, which is one of error monitoring processing (step S203) in FIG. 23. FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart of a medal count control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of game control command transmission processing (step S207) in FIG. 23. FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of a medal count control unit main process; FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of RAM abnormality determination processing (step S302) in FIG. 27; FIG. 4 is a table showing a target range of RAM clear processing; FIG. 29 is a flowchart of error request setting processing (step S3022) in FIG. 28 and the like; FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of preparation processing (step S303) in FIG. 27; FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of gaming machine information notification transmission processing (step S304) in FIG. 27; FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of gaming machine information type acquisition processing (step S3305) in FIG. 32; FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of a count notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG. 27; FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart of a rental notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 27; FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of lending reception result response transmission processing (step S308) in FIG. 27; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing of a medal count control unit; FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart of a lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 37; FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 38. FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart of an update process (step S405) to be counted in FIG. 37; FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. 37; FIG. It is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. 41. It is a flowchart (first half) of game control priority command reception processing (step S4305) in FIG. It is a flowchart (second half) of the game control priority command reception processing (step S4305) in FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of input command reception processing (step S4517) in FIG. 44; FIG. 45 is a flowchart of settlement command reception processing (step S4519) in FIG. 44; FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG. 44; FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of game information setting processing (steps S4806 and S4A19) in FIGS. 47 and 49; FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 44; FIG. 50 is a flowchart of game medal number overflow confirmation processing (step S4A11) in FIG. 49. FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of error occurrence command reception processing (step S4524) in FIG. 44; FIG. 38 is a flowchart of error monitoring processing (step S407) in FIG. 37; FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart of a medal count control command transmission process (step S408) addressed to the game control unit in FIG. 37; FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a display device display process (step S409) in FIG. 37; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing a modification of the process during medal insertion in FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 20; FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing a modification of the input command reception process of FIG. 45; FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing a modification of the planned count number update process of FIG. 40; FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing a modification of the planned count number update process of FIG. 40; FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (d) is a flowchart of command processing (step S307) in (a). (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a first example in which a count button 171 is operated; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a first example of an effect during counting; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example in which a betting operation is performed before the counting button 171 is operated and the number of bets is not 0. FIG. It is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end effect. 4 is a timing chart showing an example when the settlement button 134 is operated; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the count button 171 increases. 67(a) is a timing chart showing an example of a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 67(c), and (b) is a state in which 30 sheets are set as the number to be counted in the example shown in FIG. 67(c). 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is cut off at , and then the power is restored. FIG. 60 is a timing chart showing an example in which the planned number update process of FIG. 59 is employed; FIG. (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value; 4 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power failure occurs and the power is restored; It is a figure which shows the example of a display showing that automatic counting is in progress. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power failure occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long-pressing operation, has elapsed since the operation of the count button 171 was started. FIG. FIG. 74 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 73; FIG. FIG. 74 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 73; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of change display on the game medal number display device 170; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which the effect image display device 157 displays the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 in addition to the game medal number display device 170; FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 78; 79 is a diagram showing another example that is completely different from the example shown in FIG. 78. FIG. (a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed in excess of the payout threshold, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of an error notification of exceeding the upper limit. (a) is a timing chart when the payout is going to be performed after exceeding the second payout threshold, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of the approaching upper limit notification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which a notification prompting counting is superimposed on an error notification with high urgency; (a) is a diagram showing an example in which the notification prompting the count continues even after transition to the demonstration display, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of notification after the count button 171 is operated during the demonstration. . (a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a prescribed number such as a payout threshold value or a second payout threshold value and then falls below the prescribed number; 10 is a diagram showing an example of notification prompting counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over a plurality of games; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of performing a notification prompting counting each time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number; FIG. 11C is a diagram showing an example, and (c) is a diagram showing an example in which the count button 171 is operated in a state disadvantageous to the player. 86(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 86(b), (b) is a diagram showing an example in which the counting forcefully terminated once is restarted, and (c) is an example of the modified example described using (a) and (b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, normal state). 7 is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a second modification in which the operation differs depending on whether or not the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off; FIG. It is a figure which shows the change of the number of game medals when the count button 171 is long-pressed. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation performed according to the number of game medals. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation performed according to the number of acquisition medals in AT state. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement when overflow of a game medal|token occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a game medal number upper limit exceeded error and a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur at the same time. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal number control unit disconnection error occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a sound output permission period is provided in outputting a counting sound for a counting process; 98(a) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 98(a). FIG. FIG. 98(b) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 98(b).

A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Basic embodiment>
A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the present embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information corresponding to the number of actual medals (virtual medal count) is used without using actual medals. number” shall be used.

In the slot machine described below, when a predetermined number of game medals are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are applied thereto, a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received to start rotation of the reels. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped meets the predetermined payout condition, the process of paying out the number of game medals is executed and the match is completed. If not, the gaming machine advances a series of games ending without executing the process of paying out the number of game medals.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 and the basic configuration of the lending machine 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Prepare. Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip-like members at equal intervals, and the strip-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three times in the vertical direction from the display window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 is the upper symbol of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 is the middle symbol of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 is the lower symbol of the left reel, and the middle reel. The symbol displayed on the upper stage of 111 is the upper stage symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 is the middle stage symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 is the lower stage symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed on the right reel 112 is The symbols displayed on the upper row are called right reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 are called right reel middle row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the lower row of the right reel 112 are called right reel lower row symbols. Each of the symbols 112 to 112 is displayed vertically three times on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. Further, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotation direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. A winning line is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. A valid pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are 5 pay lines. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is activated, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When the book becomes valid and 3 medals are bet, the 5 lines added with the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line become valid as the winning lines. The number of winning lines is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, Five lines, ie, the winning line and the rising winning line may be effective as the winning lines. Hereinafter, an effective winning line may be referred to as an effective line.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (for example, a bonus combination, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that this internal winning state has been carried over. It is a lamp that informs the player. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role that is one of the winning roles in the previous game. It's a lamp to let you know. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet button 130 or 132 is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed. When the button is pressed once, one sheet is inserted. When the button is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of two sheets) is inserted. When the button is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of three sheets) is inserted. When the bet button 132 is pressed, three coins are thrown. Hereinafter, the bet button 130 may be referred to as a single bet button, and the bet button 132 may be referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. It should be noted that, hereinafter, the expression "given to the player" may be used in the same sense as "payout to the player". The game information display 126 and the number-of-payouts display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when the bet button 130 or 132 is operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110, the second stop operation is the stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is the "forward pushing operation order" or simply The stop operation is called "forward push", the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112, the second stop operation is the stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110. referred to as "operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The instruction monitor 125 is a display for displaying information about the order of operation (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 . This indication monitor 125 also consists of a seven segment (SEG) display. For example, when instructing to operate the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 in this order, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125, and the left stop button 137, the right stop button 139, and the middle stop button 139 are displayed. When instructing to operate the stop button 138 in order, “2” is displayed on the instruction monitor 125 .

The settlement button 134 is a button for returning the inserted game medals (the number of bets) to the medal number control section 350 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

The game medal number display device 170 is a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, and is a device for displaying the game medal number recorded by the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG.

The count button 171 is an operation means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 2) provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is provided above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided above the production device 160 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 (see FIG. 2) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that the effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of effect means.

The lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 1 is sometimes called a card unit, and corresponds to an example of the game medium management device of the present invention. This lending machine 700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 100 .

The lending machine 700 accepts cards. There are two types of "cards" here. One is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game storage medium issued to general players who have not registered as members. The other is a membership card, which is a game storage medium issued to a member player who has registered as a member of a game arcade. An IC card is used as the card.

Valuable value is stored in the card. Valuable values stored in the card include "number of medals possessed" and "monetary balance" which is the balance of prepaid money.

The lending machine 700 that accepts the card has a function of converting the "number of medals possessed" stored in the card into the "number of game medals (number of credits)".

The “number of game medals (number of credits)” is data that can be used for setting the number of bets and can be converted into “number of medals possessed”. The "number of game medals" can be obtained by withdrawing the "monetary balance" of the card or the "number of medals possessed". In addition, the "number of game medals" includes the number of medals obtained by winning prizes. This "number of game medals" is managed by the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 2, and is the number of electronic medals electromagnetically stored (amount of electronic game value). By performing the insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 and 132, the "number of game medals" is subtracted.

The “number of medals possessed” is a value obtained by converting the “number of game medals (number of credits)” into a numerical value. This "number of medals possessed" is stored so as to be identifiable by the player's card. That is, by operating the counting button 171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of owned medals", which can be stored in the card. The "number of owned medals" may be managed by a management device for managing the number of owned medals installed in the game arcade.

On the front side of the lending machine 700, a banknote insertion slot 701 for inserting banknotes is provided at the top, and a card insertion slot 702 for inserting cards is provided at the bottom. A card reader/writer receives a member card or visitor card inserted into the card slot 702, and reads information stored in the card. The bills inserted into the bill insertion slot 701 are identified for authenticity and bill type, and the denomination of the bill is stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as a "monetary balance".

An information display 703 is provided below the banknote insertion slot 701 . This information display device 703 is a display device for providing operation guidance of the rental machine 700, the state of the slot machine 100, and the like in the form of characters and images. It should be noted that the surface may be composed of a touch panel, and various operations may be input by touching various displayed items with a finger.

Under the information display 703, a money balance display 705 and a medal balance display 706 are arranged in two stages, one above the other. The "money balance" stored in the card inserted into the card slot 702 is displayed on the money balance display 705 as the amount. On the other hand, the medal number balance display 706 displays the "number of medals possessed" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as the number of medals.

A lending button 707 and a card returning button 708 are provided at the central portion of the lending machine 700 in the vertical direction. The lending button 707 is an operation means for performing an operation for withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card slot 702 and obtaining the "number of game medals." Specifically, when the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "monetary balance", the LED lamp built into the lending button 707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the lending button 707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is added according to the money to be withdrawn. For example, the "number of game medals" equivalent to 1000 yen is added as the predetermined amount. Also, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than a predetermined amount (for example, less than 1000 yen), only the "number of game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate is added. Even if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the "number of game medals" corresponding to the predetermined amount can be added by replenishing the "number of medals" stored in the card. good. The card return button 708 is operated by the player when the game ends, and is an operation means for storing the "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game in the card inserted in the card slot 702 and ejecting the card. is. The "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game is obtained by subtracting the number of medals converted from the "number of medals held" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 into the "number of game medals", and then counting. The number of medals is obtained by adding the number of game medals counted by the operation.

Each of the data of "monetary balance", "number of medals", and "number of game medals" described above is stored in the order of "money balance" and "number of medals" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals". will be converted. In this way, the "number of game medals" specified by the card is converted into the "number of game medals", and in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of bets can be set using the "number of game medals". Therefore, players who are accustomed to conventional slot machines in which real medals are lent, credits are secured by inserting the real medals, and the number of bets is set using the credits are confused. It is possible to provide a game by a new slot machine (management game machine) that does not use real medals without giving any money.

Although this specification does not mention "the number of stored medals", this "the number of stored medals" is the number of owned medals deposited in the game hall rather than being stored in the card. In the game hall, the number of medals acquired by the player in the game is managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. number" may be managed. When both the "number of stored medals" and the "number of owned medals" are stored, the "number of owned medals" is preferentially withdrawn. Also, both the "number of medals possessed" and the "number of medals saved" may be stored in the host server (intermediate management terminal 810 or management server 820 shown in FIG. 5) in association with the card number. In the case of the visitor card, the "number of medals possessed" is directly stored in the visitor card, but the "number of medals possessed" may be stored in the host server in association with the card number. When the card number is stored in the host server in correspondence with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the host server may be written in the card (member card, visitor card) and ejected. As for the "monetary balance", the card (member card, visitor card) is directly written and ejected. The timing at which the "number of medals possessed" is stored in a card (member card, visitor card) or the host server is, for example, the timing at which the counting button 171 is operated and the counting process is performed. However, instead of this, the information may be stored collectively when the cards are returned. Furthermore, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the lending machine 700, the "number of medals possessed" stored in the lending machine 700 is once stored in the hall management terminal 800 as accumulated medals. When the player inserts the card again into the same or another lending machine 700 on the same day as the card is returned, only the "number of tokens possessed" for that day, which was once stored as accumulated medals, is returned to the lending machine. 700, and the "number of game medals" may be added within the range of the "number of medals possessed" to enable a game to be played.

Also, the rental machine 700 may be provided with an IR sensitive unit that receives an infrared signal from a remote control carried by a game hall attendant, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal.

Furthermore, the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 1 allows lending of the "number of game medals" by operating the lending button 707 and withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card. It may be possible to withdraw the "number of medals possessed" and convert it to "number of game medals". Specifically, a coin holding button is provided in the lending machine 700, and when the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 has a "number of holding medals", an LED lamp built into the holding medal button can be pulled out. Lights up in a manner that represents By operating the possess medal button in this state, if the number of possess medals is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, 50), the predetermined number (eg, 50) of "game medal count" is added. In addition, the above-described number of medals acquired by the player in the game is stored in the card as "points" during the day, or managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. 700 is provided with a replay button. When there is a "score", the built-in LED lamp of the replay button lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the replay button in this state, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of "game medals" may be added.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited.

《Main control unit》
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 has a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game and a medal count control unit 350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control unit 302 corresponds to an example of game control means, and the medal count control unit 350 corresponds to an example of game value control means. The game control unit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, reel pattern arrangement and stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, It is equipped with an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the medal count control section 350, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit (not shown) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator (not shown). Then, a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 executes game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit. Start (start the main control unit main processing, which will be described later).

Also, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 monitors the states of the bet buttons 130 and 132, the start lever 135, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the settlement button 134 at each interrupt time. For example, when it is detected that the bet buttons 130 and 132 have been turned on, a process of electronically inserting medals electronically stored in the medal number control section 350 as medals to be inserted into a game is executed. When it detects that the start lever 135 has been turned on, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit. The random number generating circuit that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery. When it is detected that the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, or the right stop button 139 is turned on, if the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to each stop button are in a stoppable state, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Execute control. When it is detected that the settlement button 134 has been turned on, a process of returning the electronically inserted game medals to the medal count control section 350 is executed.

In addition, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 monitors the state of various sensors 318 (the optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) at each interrupt time. ing. The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112, and the light shield provided on the reel frame. It becomes L level every time a piece passes. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 drives display devices such as a drive circuit 322 that drives the motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 3) provided for the reels 110 to 112, an instruction monitor 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127. A driving circuit 324 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121). I have.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 100, set values are set to give different degrees of advantage to the players. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. Specifically, an internal winning probability is determined for each set value. A setting change button 175 is connected to the game control unit 302 to be operated when changing the setting value.

In addition, an information output circuit 328 is connected to the game control unit 302, and the main control unit 300, through the information output circuit 328, outputs an information input circuit provided in an external hall computer 600 (see FIG. 5) or the like. 650 outputs the game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game).

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 respectively.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

Like the game control unit 302, the medal number control unit 350 also includes a CPU 354, a ROM 356, a RAM 358, an I/O 360 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 362 is installed. The CPUs 304 and 354 are provided on the same substrate and connected via a buffer IC. As a result, the CPU 304 is made to use the ROM 306 and the RAM 308 and the ROM 356 and the RAM 358 are not made to be used, and the CPU 354 is made to use the ROM 356 and the RAM 358 and the ROM 306 and the RAM 308 are not made to be used. A WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) is also installed. The CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 also operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 354 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 356 to the counter timer 362, and the counter timer 362 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 354 for each interrupt time. The CPU 354 operates in response to this interrupt request. The medal number control section 350 executes an interrupt process (a medal number control section timer interrupt process to be described later) at 0.745 ms. Further, communication with the rental machine 700 is repeated at a cycle of 300ms.

The CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also has a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also outputs this start signal. When the activation signal is input from the circuit, medal count control is started (the medal count control unit main processing, which will be described later, is started).

A basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 is connected to a game medal number display device 170 composed of a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, a count button 171 and a game medal number clear button 172 .

In addition, the basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 is also connected to the lending machine 700 via a lending machine connection terminal board 790 . The medal count control section 350 performs two-way communication with the lending machine 700 .

The medal number control section 350 transmits various commands to the game control section 302 . The game control section 302 also transmits various commands to the medal number control section 350 . That is, the communication between the medal count control section 350 and the game control section 302 is also two-way communication.

Also, the medal count control unit 350 stores the “game medal count” in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 . Specifically, the "number of game medals" is stored in the credit counter. The medal count control unit 350 updates the “game medal count” stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 by addition processing or subtraction processing. As the addition processing, processing based on a payout command transmitted from the game control unit 302, processing based on a settlement command transmitted from the game control unit 302, and processing based on a lending notification transmitted from the lending machine 700 is given. On the other hand, as subtraction processing, there are counting processing based on operation of the counting button 171 and processing based on an input command transmitted from the game control section 302 .

The game medal number clear button 172 shown in FIG. This is an operation means for clearing the "number of game medals" stored in the . For example, if a player is absent with "2" remaining in the number of game medals, it becomes difficult to determine whether the player who has left "2" intends to continue playing the game. Although the game cannot be started, if the number of game medals can be cleared by the clerk's operation, another player can be welcomed early. When the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, the "number of game medals" is not necessarily cleared. , counting may be performed in the same manner as when the counting button 171 is operated. If the counting button 171 fails to recognize that the counting button 171 has been operated, the ``number of game medals'' cannot be converted into the ``number of medals possessed,'' and there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged. However, if the counter can be counted by the store clerk's operation, the player will not be disadvantaged. Furthermore, since there is no need to newly provide a counting button for the store clerk, there is no cost increase. It should be noted that clearing and counting may not be determined by judging the number of game medals, and clearing and counting may be determined according to the operation method of the game medal number clear button 172 . For example, it is cleared when pressed for a short time, and counted when pressed for a long time. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals. Also, it is cleared when only the game medal number clear button 172 is operated, and is counted when the game medal number clear button 172 and other buttons are operated at the same time. It is less likely that you will make a mistake in operation, and you can easily choose between clearing and counting.

《Sub-controller》
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 (game control unit 302) via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 . Note that these speakers 272 and 277 correspond to an example of the rendering means.

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, reel backlight, etc.) are connected. Note that the various lamps 420 correspond to an example of effect means.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

Next, an example of connection between each board such as the power control board, the main control board and the first sub-control board and each unit such as the reel unit and the effect movable body unit will be described.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

FIG. 3 shows a power supply control board 252B, a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, a reel unit 109, and an effect movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163 incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC2 to MC6 and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power control board 252B, the main control board 300B and the first sub-control board 400B. Also, one or a plurality of connectors RC1 to RC3 and DC1 are shown in each of the reel unit 109 and the effect movable body unit 160U.

An island facility installed in a game machine installation office steps down a 100V AC power supply to a voltage of 24V, and supplies a 24V AC current to the pachinko machine 100 through a power cord 265 connected to a connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage and a 5V DC voltage in the power control board 252B. In addition, although it may be converted into other DC voltages, the DC voltage of 24V and the DC voltage of 5V will be explained here.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 3 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line and connected to the 5V power line. Also shown are power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. A power switch 244 is also shown.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V through the harness PM. .

A 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V direct current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a direct current of 5V is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

The main control board 300B may also be supplied with 24V and 5V through separate harnesses, like the first sub-control board 400B. Also, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, like the main control board 300B.

The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 3 also shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power supply line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power supply line of the main control board 300B. . 3 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED24ML is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A reel motor drive IC 322i is mounted on the main control board 300B. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are also supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i. Although not shown, the main control board 300B includes the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. ing.

The connector MC2 connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i of the main control board 300B and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR1. A connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected by a harness MR2, and a connector MC4 to which the reel motor drive IC 322i is also connected and a connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR3. The reel unit 109 is supplied with the 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i through these harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively, and the motors 110m to 112m provided for each reel are driven. become drivable. Control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 109 side are made into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You can connect with However, one common harness is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission) and is not used for current supply.

A 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line are also shown on the first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. A 24V direct current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B, and a 5V direct current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B. current flows. Also, on the first sub-controller board 400B shown in FIG. 3, there are also a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power supply line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current flows, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current flows. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. The movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. A DC current of 24V and a DC current of 5V are supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the first sub-control board 400B includes the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the effect movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The direct current of 24V and the direct current of 5V supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are supplied to the movable body unit 160U through the harness SD, and the motor 163m provided in the movable body unit 160U is driven. be possible. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 also includes a second sub-controller 500 as shown in FIG. 2, and although not shown in FIG. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are supplied through the harnesses shown. Also, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B with a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same manner as the first sub-control board 400B.

As described above, the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are electrically connected by the harnesses MR1-MR3. Also, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 160U are electrically connected by a harness SD.

Here, based on the above configuration, the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated will be described. Note that the power failure state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be in a state in which no power is supplied from the island facility (the same shall apply hereinafter). If power is not supplied from the island facility, the power is cut off even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on. Each reel 110-112 can be manually rotated in either the forward or reverse direction even in such a power failure condition.

Any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 (power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. ) are also extinguished in the power failure state.

However, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the motor 110m (see FIG. 3) that rotates the left reel 110 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 3, the induced current generated by the motor 110m flows through the harness MR1 into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the reel driving IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Lights up due to induced current. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues lighting for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is turned off before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. A capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may also be provided on the 5V power supply line.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B this time flows through the harness PM into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC2 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Lights up due to induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B emit light. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues lighting for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power line. In addition, since the power control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power line, the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues lighting for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PS1 into the first sub-control board 400B and is supplied from the connector SC1 to the 24V power line. A secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR. Also, the induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B flows through the harness PS2 into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the connector SC2 to the 5V power line. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control substrate 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control substrate 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B emit light. There will be Even if manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL continues lighting for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description is a description of the phenomenon that occurs when the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness MR1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and/or the connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the 3 are not illuminated, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if none of the monitor LEDs, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or the connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up, but the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL do not light up. As a result, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, although the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and If the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is not lit, an abnormality in the harness PM or poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Even when the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B are lit by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Further, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not normally connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the secondary control 24V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 5V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done.

Here, the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in the power failure state has been described, but even when the middle reel 111 is manually rotated in the power failure state, the right reel 112 can be manually rotated in the power failure state. The same is true when rotating. In addition, when the number of reels to be manually rotated increases, the monitor LED emits bright light. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111 and right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits brighter light than when only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

In addition, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, the main control 5V monitor LED5ML, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL LEDs used for different purposes from the monitor LED ( For example, even if an error monitoring LED that emits light when an error occurs, or a signal monitoring LED, etc.), if it is provided with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, it can be manually operated in the power failure state. When the left reel 110 is rotated, light is emitted if there is no electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a purpose other than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

Moreover, even in the power-off state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 1 can be manually opened and closed.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the motor 163m (see FIG. 3) that opens and closes the shutter 163 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 3, the induced current generated by the motor 163m flows through the harness SD into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the movable body motor drive IC 424i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. be done. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL is also adjusted in resistance value by the secondary control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Lights up due to induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B this time flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied from the connector PC3 to the 24V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. In addition, the induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B also passes through the harness PS2, flows into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC4 to the 5V power line. The power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power control substrate 252B emit light.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B, and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Lights up due to induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B emit light. There will be

The above explanation is for the phenomena that occur when the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, if none of the monitor LEDs, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. A bad connection can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector SC1 and/or the connector PC3, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the secondary control 24V monitor LED24SL and the secondary control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 and a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Even when the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be controlled by manually opening and closing the shutter 163. ) can be lit.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or the connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the main control 24V monitor of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only LED24ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML do not light up. As a result, even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML out of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 3 and the reel unit 109 also shown in FIG. In the following, differences from the connection example described with reference to FIG. 3 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In FIG. 4, the connector MC5 and the connector MC6 provided on the main control board 300B are omitted. A reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 shown in FIG.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Further, a connector RRM3 to which the harness MR31 connected to the connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which the harness MR32 connected to the connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 is connected are also provided.

Even in the connection example in FIG. 4, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in the power failure state, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are disconnected or not properly connected, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

In the connection example in FIG. 4, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased compared to the connection example shown in FIG. 3 due to the provision of the reel relay board 902B. is becoming more sexual. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and poor electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

The reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. An induced current is generated by manual operation in the power-off state, and if the monitor LED is normal, these monitor LEDs are also turned on, so that it is possible to confirm the electrical connection failure.

In the description here, the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112, and the shutter 163 are described as the movable bodies, but the movable bodies are not limited to these, and may be motor-driven movable bodies.

Furthermore, in place of the LED lamp which is lit by an induced current in the power failure state, a light emitting means such as a 7-segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A requirement for the light emitting means is that it be visible. These light emitting means do not move even when the motor is driven. This is because the light emitting means is not provided on the movable body that is driven by the motor and is provided on the fixed substrate.

In the above description, the adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) are used to cause the monitor LED to emit light by the induced current in the power-off state. That is fine, and it is not limited to the adjustment resistor. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems. need to be adjusted.

In addition, the configuration described above is
light emitting means;
a movable body unit having a movable body operable by being driven by a motor;
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness,
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means,
The light emitting means corresponds to an example of a game machine characterized in that it does not move even when the motor is driven.

FIG. 5 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5, the gaming system S has the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the lending machine 700 also shown in FIG. The rental machine 700, the hall computer 600, and the hall management terminal 800 are collectively referred to as an external processing device. One of the features of this external processing device is that it has storage means.

The hall management terminal 800 is a computer different from the hall computer 600, is installed in each of the game halls (halls) H1, H2, . . . Since the lending machine 700 is connected to the slot machine 100 , the hall management terminal 800 is connected to the slot machine 100 via the lending machine 700 . To the hall management terminal 800, information about the number of medals (counting information and lending information) performed between the lending machine 700 and the slot machine 100 and information about the operating state of the slot machine 100 are input. The hall management terminal 800 records and manages the input information.

The management server 820 is provided for overall management of the gaming system 1, and includes information on the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700, such as information identifying the slot machine 100 and information identifying the lending machine 700 (gaming machine installation information) and manages this information. Management server 820 is connected to hall management terminals 800 of many halls via intermediate management terminals 810, and information obtained by communicating with hall management terminals 800, that is, information on the number of medals, slot Information such as the operating state of the machine 100 is also managed.

<<Communication sequence and communication contents>>
Commands are transmitted and received between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 . The game control unit 302 transmits a game control unit command (game control state command, game control priority command) to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms. On the other hand, the medal count control section 350 transmits a medal count control command (medal count control state command, response command) to the game control section 302 every 5.96 ms. In addition, in the game control unit 302, the game control priority command is transmitted with priority over the game control state command. Further, in the medal number control section 350, a response command corresponding to the game control priority command is transmitted with priority over the medal number control state command.

In communication between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 and communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700, gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information are transmitted and received. be.

FIG. 6 is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine state information shown in FIG. 6(a) is roughly divided into three types of state information: advantageous state information, setting state information, and front door state information. The advantageous state information includes information (RB information) indicating whether or not the bonus operation state is equivalent to RB, information indicating whether or not the bonus operation state is equivalent to BB (BB information), and bonus operation state equivalent to AT (assist time). It consists of information (AT information) indicating whether or not. The setting state information includes information indicating whether or not the setting state is changed by operating the setting button 175 shown in FIG. information). The front door state information is information (door open information) indicating whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state. Note that the AT state is a game state in which auxiliary functions such as notification of the stop operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and notification of symbols to be aimed and stopped are activated so that the player can obtain advantageous results.

The gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 6(b) includes total inserted number information, total payout number information, MY counter value information, total bonus payout number information, continuous bonus total payout number information, number of games played information, role ratio. Contains monitor information. The total inserted number information is information representing the accumulated number of inserted medals since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replay is not included. The total payout number information is information representing the cumulative number of payout medals since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replay is not included. The MY counter value information is information representing the maximum value of the MY counter calculated after the power is turned on. The slot machine 100 has a state in which the order of stop operations for internally won hands is notified, and the MY counter is a counter that counts the number of net increase in medals after shifting to this state. The information on the total payout number of the accessory is information representing the number of medals to be paid out due to the operation of the accessory accumulated since the power was turned on. The continuous accessory total payout number information is information representing the payout number of medals accumulated by the operation of the RB since the power was turned on. The number-of-games information is information representing the number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. The role ratio monitor information is information representing various ratios (role ratio, continuous role ratio, advantageous section ratio, instructed role ratio, role state ratio) for evaluating the gambling nature of the gaming machine. become.

The gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 6(c) includes two types of information, ie, game control unit information and medal count control unit information. The game control section information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the game control section 302, the maker code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip. The medal number control section information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the medal number control section 350, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal count control section 350. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 7 shows the first sub-controller 400, the game controller 302, the number-of-medals controller 350, and the lending machine 700 from the left.

First, communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 will be explained before explaining the game control state command. A token amount control section 350 is connected to the lending machine 700 , and communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is performed between the token number control section 350 and the lending machine 700 . Communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700 is performed at a cycle of 300 ms.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game machine information notification and the counting notification are transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 . In addition, a lending notification is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 , and upon receiving this lending notification, the medal count control section 350 returns a lending reception result response notification to the lending machine 700 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the details of communication between the medal count control section 350 and the lending machine 700. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing the data structure of messages exchanged in communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. FIG. This message consists of five types: message length, command, serial number, data part, and checker. The message length stores the length of the entire message. The command stores a command code for identifying the type of gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, and lending reception result response notification. The serial number stores the serial number for the gaming machine information notification, the counting serial number for the count notification, and the lending serial number for the lending notice and the lending reception result response notice. The range of various serial numbers is 0 to 255, and the serial number becomes 0 when the power is turned on, returns to 1 when reaching 255, and then repeats from 1 to 255. Various types of data are stored in the data section, and the checksum is the sum of the data from the message length to the data section, and the lower 1 byte of the sum is stored.

FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data portion of the gaming machine information notification. The data portion of the game machine information notification stores a code representing the type of the game machine, such as pachinko type game machine, reel type game machine, and arrange ball game machine. In the case of this embodiment, a code representing a reel-type gaming machine is stored. The gaming machine information type includes hall control/fraud monitoring information in addition to the gaming machine performance information and gaming machine installation information described with reference to FIG. The game machine information type stores a code for identifying which of these three types of information the information is.

FIG. 9(a) is a diagram showing the details of hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information.

The information on the number of game medals is information representing the current number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350 .

The information on the number of inserted medals is the number of inserted medals, and the number of returned medals when there are returned medals when the settlement button 134 (see FIG. 1) is operated. Minute information (-3 to 3 sheets). That is, it is information based on information on the number of inserted medals and information on the number of settled medals included in the game control priority command (insertion command, settlement command) transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350 .

The paid-out medal number information is information representing the number of paid-out medals. This payout medal number information is information based on information on the number of payout medals included in the game control priority command (payout command) transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350 .

The advantageous state information is the advantageous state information shown in FIG. 6(a) described using FIG. In addition, information representing the state of the gaming machine may be included.

The gaming machine error state information is information represented by an error code.

FIG. 9B is a list of error codes. Regarding various errors shown in FIG. 9B, the medal count control state command, various processing commands sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400, and game control priority commands (error generation command).

Only errors that require special explanation will be explained below. The medal number control disconnection is an error when the game control unit 302 detects the disconnection of the medal number control unit 350, and the game control disconnection is the opposite. This is an error when it is detected. The game order abnormality is an error that the order of game progress in the game control unit 302 is abnormal. The game control command serial number abnormality is an error that the serial number of the command from the game control unit 302 is a value other than the value obtained by adding 1 to the previous value. The payout number abnormality is an error when the payout number included in the game control state command is out of the range of 0 to 15 sheets. That is, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the maximum number of coins for one payout is fifteen. The settlement number mismatch is an error when the settlement number included in the game control priority command (settlement command) is equal to or greater than the input number. Chip ID number mismatch is an error when the IC chip number information in the game control unit information shown in FIG. 6(c) is different from the previous information. The medal count control RAM error is an error that indicates that the RAM 358 of the medal count control section 350 is defective. The lending machine communication abnormality is an error such that a lending notification is not received even though the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in the ON state, which will be described later in detail. When any of the various errors shown in FIG. 9(b) occurs, all seven segments of the instruction monitor 125 shown in FIG. Also, the effect image display device 157 displays an error code for display.

The gaming machine fraud information includes setting state information and front door information shown in FIG. 6(a) described using FIG. It contains information, a security signal indicating that fraud is being detected, and the like.

The information on the number of game information is the information on the current bet amount and the information on the payout amount. These two pieces of information are distinguished by type information. The current bet number is included in the start lever acceptance command (game control state command) when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the start lever acceptance command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. bet is the current bet value. Also, when a payout command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350, the number of payouts is the value of the number of payouts included in the payout command.

Returning to the explanation using FIG. 8(b), the game machine information notification sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at a cycle of 300 ms includes the game machine information of the code specified by the game machine information type. stored. That is, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, the gaming machine performance information, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, the gaming machine installation information, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the hall controller・Incorrect monitoring information is stored. The gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information, and the hole controller/fraud monitoring information have different notification intervals, and the gaming machine performance information is notified once at the longest first time (for example, 180 seconds), The gaming machine installation information is notified once every second time period (eg, 60 seconds), and the hall control/fraud monitoring information is notified at the shortest third time period (eg, 300 ms of notification cycle). When the notification timings of these three pieces of information overlap, the notification of the gaming machine installation information has the highest priority, followed by the notification of the gaming machine performance information. The lowest priority is the hall control/fraud monitoring information with the highest number of notifications.

FIG. 8(c) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data portion of the count notification transmitted from the medal number control section 350 to the lending machine 700 at intervals of 300 ms. Note that, as shown in FIG. 7, the count notification is sent within a range of 90 ms or more and 100 ms or less from the start of the game machine information notification. This is managed by a counting notification interval timer set to 90 ms in step S3303 shown in FIG. 32 to be described later. As will be described later in detail, when the count button 171 shown in FIG. , the number of medals corresponding to the number of short presses becomes the counted number. On the other hand, when the cycle of 300 ms arrives while the counting button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or more, the number of sheets to be counted is 50 sheets. That is, the number of sheets to be counted can be set in units of one sheet, or 50 sheets can be set at once. However, if the number of counted medals exceeds the value of the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358, this value of the number of game medals is set as the number of counted medals. The medal number information is information representing the number of medals to be counted determined by the operation of the counting button 171 until the cycle of 300 ms arrives. The number of counted accumulated medals is information representing the number of counted medals accumulated since the power was turned on.

FIG. 8(d) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data portion of the lending notification sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 at intervals of 300 ms. Note that, as shown in FIG. 7, the lending machine 700 notifies the medal count control section 350 of the lending notification within 170 ms from the start of reception of the counting notification. The medal number control section 350 monitors whether or not the lending notification is notified within 170 ms by the lending notification interval timer set to 170 ms in step S3502 shown in FIG. 34 to be described later. When the lending button 707 of the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 1 is operated, if the "monetary balance" of the card is a predetermined amount (eg, 1000 yen) or more, the number of medals corresponding to the predetermined amount (eg, 50) is the number of loaned medals. On the other hand, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the number of medals converted from the current balance at the predetermined rate becomes the number of loaned medals. The information on the number of loaned medals is information representing the number of loaned medals corresponding to the operation of the loan button 707 in this way. It should be noted that the predetermined amount and the number of medals corresponding to the predetermined amount can be set in the lending machine 700 in advance.

FIG. 8(e) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data portion of the lending acceptance result response returned from the medal count control section 350 to the lending machine 700. FIG. Although details will be described later, in the medal number control unit 350, the number of loaned medals notified by the loan notification is 50 or less, or the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 is less than the lending threshold value (for example, 15000). or whether counting processing is not performed, etc., and decides whether the loaned medal number reception result is normal or abnormal. This receipt result is sent to the lending machine 700 in the lending receipt result response.

Next, the game control state commands that the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 7 transmits to the medal count control unit 350 every 2.98 ms will be described.

FIG. 10 is a table showing game control state commands.

The game control state command is a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the high-order byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining high-order 7 bits represent the command type, and the low-order byte represents the content. FIG. 10 also shows command offsets used for transmission.

The game control unit 302 transmits a command representing advantageous state information (RB information, BB information, AT information), and after 2.98 ms, transmits a command representing setting state information (information during setting change, information during setting confirmation). After 2.98 ms have elapsed, a command representing front door state information (door open information) is transmitted. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine status information.

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of inserted sheets in 3 bytes (total inserted number information) is divided into three 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte of the command type with the upper byte of 13H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte of the command type with the upper byte of 14H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 15H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of payouts in 3 bytes (total number of payouts information) is divided into 1-byte portions 3 times and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte of the command type with the upper byte of 16H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte of the command type with the upper byte of 17H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 18H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the MY counter value in 3 bytes (MY counter value information) is divided into 3 batches of 1 byte each and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the 1st byte of the command type with the upper byte of 19H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the 2nd byte of the command type with the upper byte of 1AH is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 1BH. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Furthermore, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, the information representing the total number of payouts of the role product in 3 bytes (information on the total number of payouts of the role product) is divided into three 1-byte portions three times at intervals of 2.98 ms. Send with That is, the 1st byte is transmitted with the command type of which the upper byte is 1CH, and after 2.98ms, the 2nd byte is transmitted with the command type of which the upper byte is 1DH, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 1EH. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Then, when 2.98 ms elapses, information representing the total number of continuous bonuses paid out in 3 bytes (continuous bonuses total payout number information) is divided into three 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the 1st byte is transmitted with the command type whose upper byte is 1FH, and after 2.98 ms, the 2nd byte is transmitted with the command type whose upper byte is 20H, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 21H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of games in 2 bytes (number of games information) is divided into two 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte of the command type with the upper byte of 22H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte of the command type with the upper byte of 23H is transmitted.

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, the role ratio monitor information is transmitted over 5 commands at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the command type with the upper byte of 24H transmits the information indicating the role ratio, the command type with the upper byte of 25H transmits the information indicating the continuous role ratio with the command type of the upper byte of 26H, and the advantageous section ratio is sent with the command type with the upper byte of 26H. , the command type with the upper byte of 27H transmits the information indicating the instructed role product ratio, and the command type with the upper byte of 28H sends the information indicating the role product state ratio. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, when 2.98 ms has passed, the game control unit information is transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms over 15 commands. That is, the information representing the IC chip ID number of the game control unit 302 by 4 bytes is divided into 4 times by 1 byte and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. Next, the information representing the IC chip maker code of the game control unit 302 in 3 bytes is divided into 1-byte portions 3 times and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. Subsequently, the information representing the IC chip product code of the game control unit 302 in 8 bytes is divided into 1-byte portions 8 times and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine installation information.

Finally, send the checksum value. When the transmission of the checksum value is completed, it returns to the transmission of the advantageous state information, and thereafter repeats transmitting the game control state commands shown in FIG. 10 one by one at intervals of 2.98 ms. In addition, when there is a game control priority command, the transmission of the game control state command is interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, the medal count control state command that the medal count control section 350 shown in FIG. 7 transmits to the game control section 302 every 5.96 ms will be described.

FIG. 11 is a table showing medal number control state commands.

The medal number control state command is also a 16-bit command, and the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits indicate the command type, and the lower byte indicates the content. Note that FIG. 11 also shows command offsets used for transmission.

The medal count control section 350 transmits VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in an ON state. This VL signal information corresponds to basic information, and may include other information.

Then, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, the information representing the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 in 2 bytes is divided into upper and lower 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 5.96 ms. That is, the command type with the upper byte of 02H is transmitted for the lower 1 byte, and when 5.96 ms elapses, the command type with the upper byte of 03H is transmitted for the upper 1 byte.

When 5.96 ms elapses, information representing the counted number of sheets (counted number of sheets information) is transmitted, and when 5.96 ms elapses, information representing the rented number of sheets (lending number of sheets information) is transmitted.

Finally, the error code explained with reference to FIG. 9(b) is transmitted. When the transmission of the error code is completed, the process returns to the transmission of the VL signal information, and thereafter, the medal number control state command shown in FIG. 11 is repeatedly transmitted in order every 5.96 ms. In addition, when there is a response command to the game control priority command, transmission of the medal number control state command is interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, a security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 7 to the first sub-control unit 400 at a cycle of 100 ms will be described.

The security command includes VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal is on, door open information indicating whether or not the front door 102 is open, and "the number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. information, information representing the counted number of sheets, information representing the number of rented sheets, and the like. The information representing the "number of game medals", the information representing the number of counted tokens, and the information representing the number of loaned tokens are the information transmitted from the medal count control section 350 by the medal count control state command.

Various processing commands are also transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 . The various processing commands include, for example, a normal return command when power is restored, a setting change start command related to setting value changes, a setting change end command including changed setting values, an error occurrence command and an error cancellation command, and the number of input sheets. a bet command including a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button has been pressed; an effect information command including effect information; a start lever reception command indicating that the operation of the start button 135 has been received; Examples include first to third press commands accompanying operation acceptance, game information commands including game information, payout start commands representing start of payout, and the like. Errors in the error generation command and the error cancellation command include errors indicated by the error codes described with reference to FIG. This includes an open error, a lending machine abnormality error in which the VL signal is turned off, and the like.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal count control section 350. As shown in FIG.

The game control priority command is a command transmitted with priority over the game control state command. The game control unit 302 transmits the game control priority command to the medal control unit 350 again if there is a retransmission request from the medal control unit 350 after transmitting the game control priority command.

Drawing 13 (a) is a figure showing the details of a game control priority command.

When the game control priority command is transmitted to the medal number control section 350, a response command is returned from the medal number control section 350, and the transmission of the medal number control state command is continued without this response command being returned. There are two types of things. The former game control priority command is called a game control priority command 1, and the latter game control priority command is called a game control priority command 2. FIG. 12 shows a communication sequence when the game control priority command 1 is transmitted.

The game control priority command 1 includes a payout command, an insertion command, and a settlement command. As for the payout command, the payout number (0 to 15) is transmitted with the command type of which the upper byte is 04H, then the command serial number is transmitted with the command type of which the upper byte is 05H, and finally the command type of which the upper byte is 06H. to send the checksum. That is, in the transmission of the payout command, three commands are transmitted continuously.

The input command transmits the number of inserted sheets (0 to 3 sheets) with a command type of which the upper byte is 07H, then transmits the command serial number with a command type of which the upper byte is 08H, and finally a command type of which the upper byte is 09H. to send the checksum. That is, three commands are continuously transmitted even when an input command is transmitted.

For the settlement command, the number of sheets to be settled (0 to 3 sheets) is transmitted with the command type with the upper byte of 0AH, then the command serial number is transmitted with the command type with the upper byte of 0BH, and finally the command type with the upper byte of 0CH. to send the checksum. That is, three commands are continuously transmitted even when the settlement command is transmitted.

The number-of-medals control unit 350 shown in FIG. 12 transmits a response command when receiving the game control priority command 1 .

FIG. 13(b) is a diagram showing the details of the response command returned from the medal count control section 350 to the game control section 302. As shown in FIG.

The response command is sent in response to the payout command (payout response), in response to the input command (input response), and in response to the settlement command (settlement response). There is The response command has a value of 00H in the upper byte, which is the value of the command type. The payout response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and a re-request for the payout command. Here, normal corresponds to completion of payout, and abnormal corresponds to a case where the number of game medals exceeds a payout threshold value (for example, 16383 medals) due to payout.

The input response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and a re-request of the input command. It should be noted that normal here corresponds to completion of loading, and abnormal corresponds to failure of loading or invalidity of loading.

The settlement response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and a re-request of the settlement command. It should be noted that normal here corresponds to the completion of settlement, and abnormality corresponds to the case where the number of game medals exceeds the settlement threshold value (for example, 16383) due to settlement. The settlement threshold is the same value as the payout threshold described above.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), the game control priority command 2 includes an error occurrence command, a RAM clear command, and a start lever operation command. The error occurrence command is a command type whose high-order byte is 01H, and includes the occurrence of various errors shown in FIG. 9(b).

The RAM clear command is a command type in which the upper byte is 02H, and the RAM 308 normality determined by the game control unit 302 or the RAM 308 defect determined by the game control unit 302 is included.

The start lever acceptance command is a command type whose upper byte is 03H, and since the bet amount is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, information indicating the determined bet amount (current bet amount: 1 to 3) is included. command.

《Pattern arrangement》
A predetermined number of symbols of a plurality of types are arranged on each of the reels 110 to 112 . The slot machine 100 in this embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum withdrawal range from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

《Types of winning roles》
The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special combination, a replay combination, and a small combination. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

《Types of internally elected roles》
In the game, an internal winning combination is determined by lottery at the start of the game, and the winning combination corresponding to this internal winning combination is possible in the game. Depending on the combination, the result of internal winning may be carried over to the next game.

《Types of game status》
The slot machine 100 is provided with various states with different degrees of advantage, and the state changes to change the degree of advantage to improve the interest of the game.

《Overview of processing》
Processing of the game control unit 302, the medal count control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the present embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information corresponding to the number of actual medals (virtual medal count) is used without using actual medals. number” shall be used.

《Game control section main processing》
First, the game control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game control part main process.

As described above, the game control unit 302 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control section 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the game control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initialization, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, and various variables stored in the RAM 308 (including the MY counter, which will be described later) are initialized. , permits the WDT 314 to operate, sets initial values, and the like. Note that the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized when the setting is changed. Also, when it is determined that the backup data in the RAM 308 is abnormal in the recovery process, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. When this initialization is performed, a RAM clear command including information as to whether or not the initialization has been completed normally is sent to the medal count control section 350 .

In step S102, medal insertion/start lever acceptance processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined.

In step S104, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery (lottery for a combination) is performed using this and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. , to determine internally elected hands. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the working combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the game control section 302 .

In step S106, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is activated. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S107, a reel stop control process is executed. In this processing, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S108.

In step S108, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S109, a medal awarding process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S110, game state control processing is performed. Here, the status regarding the game state is updated based on the result of the game.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, details of the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in the game control unit main process of FIG. 15 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in FIG.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if there is some error status, the process proceeds to step S1002.

In step S1002, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1003, one interruption time waiting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1004.

In step S1004, interrupt processing is prohibited, and the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not a setting key operation has been accepted. If the operation of the setting key is accepted, the process proceeds to step S1006, and if the operation of the setting key is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1006, processing for confirming acceptance of the setting key operation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the VL signal is on. This VL signal is a signal that is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state. The game control section 302 grasps the state of the VL signal based on the information transmitted from the medal number control section 350 . If the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S1008, and if the VL signal is off, the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted. If the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1009, and if the operation of the start lever 135 has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay is awarded by winning a replay role. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the replay flag is on, the medal insertion/start lever reception processing is terminated.

In step S1010, the current bet number (current bet number) is compared with the number required to start the game (startable number). If the current bet number is smaller than the startable number, the process proceeds to step S1011, and if the current bet number is equal to or greater than the startable number, the process proceeds to step S1012.

In step S1011, processing during medal insertion is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again. Details of the processing during medal insertion will be described later with reference to FIG. 17 .

In step S1012, 03H is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1013. The value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is the start lever acceptance command.

In step S1013, the current number of bets is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1014.

In step S1014, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1015, a start lever acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and this medal insertion/start lever acceptance processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, details of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in the medal insertion/start lever reception process of FIG. 16 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the processing during medal insertion (step S1011) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted. If the operation of the checkout button 134 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if the operation of the checkout button 134 has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1102, a checkout button process is executed, and this process during medal insertion ends. Details of the settlement button processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 18 .

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not any of the bet buttons 130 and 132 has been operated. If the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1104, and if the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 has not been accepted, the process during medal insertion ends.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay is awarded by winning a replay role. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if the replay flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1105, 0 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process proceeds to step S1106. This requested number is a value used for setting the number of medals exchanged with the medal number control section 350 .

In step S1106, the current bet amount and the maximum bet amount (3 in this embodiment) are compared. If the current bet amount is not equal to the maximum bet amount, the process proceeds to step S1107, and if the current bet amount is equal to the maximum bet amount, the process proceeds to step S1110.

At step S1107, a value obtained by subtracting the current bet number from the maximum bet number is set as the required number of coins, and the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined whether or not the bet buttons 130 and 132 determined to have received the operation are the one bet button 130 or not. If the bet buttons 130 and 132 determined to have received the operation are the one bet button 130, the process proceeds to step S1109; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1109, 1 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process proceeds to step S1110.

From step S1105 to step S1109, the requested number of coins becomes 0 if the current bet number is the maximum bet number. Also, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated while the current bet amount is less than the maximum bet amount, if the maximum bet amount is 3 and the current bet amount is 0, the requested number is 3, and if the current bet amount is 1. , the requested number is 2, and if the current bet number is 2, the requested number is 1. Further, when the bet-one button 130 is operated while the current bet amount is less than the maximum bet amount, the requested number of bets becomes one.

In step S1110, 07H is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1111. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command to be transmitted is an input command.

In step S1111, processing for transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1112. The details of the processing for transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit will be described later with reference to FIG. 19 .

In step S1112, a response result to the command transmitted in step S1111 is waited, and it is determined whether or not this result is "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S1113, and if the response result is not "normal", the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1113, the requested number is added to the current bet amount, and the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1114, a bet button acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and this processing during medal insertion ends.

Next, details of the checkout button process (step S1102) in the medal insertion process of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the settlement button processing (step S1102) in FIG.

First, in step S1201 executed first, a settlement button acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay is awarded by winning a replay role. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the replay flag is on, this settlement button process is terminated.

In step S1203, the requested number of coins and the current bet number are set, and the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, 0AH is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1205. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command to be transmitted is the settlement command.

In step S1205, processing for transmitting variation information to the medal number control section is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1206. The details of the processing for transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit will be described later with reference to FIG. 19 .

In step S1206, it is determined whether or not the response to the command sent in step S1205 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1207, and if the response result is not "normal", this settlement button processing ends.

At step S1207, the current bet number is set to 0, and the settlement button process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 19, the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit in the medal insertion process (step S1111) in FIG. ), and variation information transmission processing (step S1605) addressed to the medal number control unit in the medal award processing of FIG. 22 will be described in detail. 17, 18, and 22. This figure is a flow chart of the variation information transmission processing (steps S1111, S1205, and S1605) addressed to the medal number control section in FIGS.

First, in step S1301, which is executed first, an initial value (4 in this embodiment) is set as the remaining number of transmissions, and the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, information indicating that the response result is "abnormal" is set, and the process proceeds to step S1303. This response result is overwritten by the response result from the medal count control section 350, but if it is not overwritten (no response), it indicates "abnormal".

In step S1303, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is some kind of error status, this processing for transmitting variation information addressed to the medal number control unit is terminated, and if there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, an initial value (a value corresponding to 100 ms in this embodiment) is set to the value of the response wait timer, and the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of transmissions, and the process proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, if the value of the remaining number of transmissions is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1307.

In step S1307, triple command transmission processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1308. The details of this triple command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1308, if the value of the response wait timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if the value of the response wait timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S1303 again.

In step S1309, if a response from the medal count control section 350 has been received, the process proceeds to step S1310, otherwise the process proceeds to step S1308 again.

At step S1310, if the result of receiving the response from the medal number control unit 350 is "request", the process proceeds to step S1303 again, and if the result is otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1311.

In step S1311, the reception result of the response from the medal count control section 350 is stored as the response result, and the process proceeds to step S1312.

In step S1312, the command serial number is incremented by 1, and the processing for transmitting variation information addressed to the medal count control unit is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 20, details of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal number control section of FIG. 19 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in FIG. Here, the triple command is a command composed of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in succession. It is a series of commands.

First, in step S1401 executed first, the checksum value is set to 0 (initialized), and the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, the requested number of medals is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1404, the transmission content (lower byte) is used to update the checksum value.

In step S1405, 1 is added to the value of the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, the command serial number is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1407, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1408, the transmission content (lower byte) is used to update the checksum value.

In step S1409, 1 is added to the value of the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a checksum is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control section 350, and the process proceeds to step S1411.

In step S1411, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 21, priority command transmission processing (step S1014) addressed to the medal number control unit in the medal insertion/start lever acceptance processing of FIG. Details of the command transmission process (steps S1403, S1406, and step S1409) will be described. 16 and 20. This figure is a flow chart of the priority command transmission processing (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) addressed to the medal count control section in FIGS.

First, in step S1501 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process proceeds to step S1502, and if the transmission buffer is not empty, this step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the transmission content (2 bytes) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control section, and this priority command transmission processing addressed to the medal number control section ends.

Next, details of the medal awarding process (step S109) in the game control unit main process of FIG. 15 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the medal giving process (step S109) in FIG.

First, in step S1601, which is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if there is some error status, the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1602, the value of the payout number is set as the requested number, and the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1603, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1601 again.

In step S1604, 04H is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1605. The value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a payout command.

In step S1605, processing for transmitting variation information to the medal number control section (FIG. 19) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1606.

In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the response to the command transmitted in step S1605 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S1607, and if the response result is not "normal", the process proceeds to step S1608.

In step S1607, a payout command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and this medal awarding process ends.

In step S1608, if there is no error request, a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout) is sent to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1601.

<< Game control unit timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the game control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game control part timer interruption process.

The game control unit 302 is provided with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 1.49 ms in this embodiment). load processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 1.49 ms, which is the cycle of the game control unit timer interrupt.

In step S203, error monitoring processing is executed. Here, processing is performed to deal with various errors such as an abnormality in the state of communication with the medal count control section 350 and an abnormality in the opening/closing state of the door. If there is any error status, an error occurrence command including information on this error status is sent to the medal count control section 350. FIG.

In step S204, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S205, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S206, a medal count control command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S207, game control command transmission processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S208, effect command transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission in the main processing of the game control unit 302, timer interrupt processing, etc. are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In this embodiment, the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 consists of 16 bits. Bit 15 is strobe information (if ON, indicates that data is set) ~ 14 are command types (for example, basic command, bet command, start lever reception command, internal winning command, reel rotation start command accompanying the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, stop button 137 to 139 operation acceptance) First to third press commands, first to third stop commands associated with stopping the reels 110 to 112, winning commands, payout number commands and payout completion commands accompanying medal payout processing, game state update commands, etc.), bits 0 to Reference numeral 10 consists of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the game control unit 302, and is included in the output schedule information Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S209, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S204, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities and medal payout abnormalities is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, various lamps 336 and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S210, security command transmission processing is executed. Specifically, a security command is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 every 100 ms. This security command contains VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal is on, door open information indicating whether or not the front door 102 is open, and "the number of game medals" stored in the RAM 308. , information representing the counted number of sheets, information representing the number of rented sheets, and the like.

In step S211, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S212, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal has been received (power cutoff has been detected), the process proceeds to step S214, and if a low voltage signal has not been received (power cutoff has not been detected), the process proceeds to step S213. move on.

In step S213, a timer interrupt termination process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. Then, it returns to the game control part main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S214, information (return data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of the power failure, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. is derived and stored in RAM 308, and the power supply status is set to "normal".

Next, using FIG. 24, the details of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 23, will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG.

First, in step S2001 executed first, if the value of the disconnection determination timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if the value of the disconnection determination timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2002, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control section 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if the strobe signal is off, the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2003, an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the disconnection determination timer, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2004, an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the disconnection determination timer, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is 1, the process proceeds to step S2006, and if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is not 1, this disconnection determination process ends.

In step S2006, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if there is some error status, this disconnection determination process ends.

In step S2007, information indicating a disconnection error with the medal count control section 350 is set as the error status, and this disconnection determination process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 25, the details of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 23 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the medal number control command receiving process (step S206) in FIG.

First, in step S2101 executed first, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal count control section 350 is ON, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if the strobe signal is OFF, this medal count control command reception processing is terminated.

In step S2102, the information in the RAM 308 is updated based on the command received from the medal count control section 350. FIG. These commands include six types of medal count control state commands (Fig. 11) and response commands (Fig. 13(b)), and the command type can be identified by the upper byte. That is, the upper byte of the received command is referenced to identify the command type, and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated based on the contents.

In step S2103, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2104, and if there is some error status, this medal number control command reception process is terminated.

In step S2104, if the received command is a command containing an error code (an error code in the medal count control section 350), the error code is set as the error status. If there is no error in the medal number control section 350, an error code indicating normality is set in the error status, but in this case, there is no error status.

Next, using FIG. 26, details of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 23 will be described. The figure is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG.

First, in step S2201 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control section 350 is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process proceeds to step S2202, and if this transmission buffer is not empty, the process proceeds to step S2207.

In step S2202, the command offset (see FIG. 10) is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 41 (1 after 41). In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 10, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted in order from the game control section 302 to the medal count control section 350 . The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be transmitted.

In step S2203, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information to be targeted by this command are read out to generate the transmission content, and the transmission content is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control section 350.

In step S2204, it is determined whether the command offset is 41 or not. Of the 41 types of commands transmitted from the game control means to the medal number control section 350, the last command (command transmitted 41st) is a check generated based on the transmission contents of the commands up to that point. It has become Sam. That is, the checksum is updated for command offsets from 1 to 40 (step S2205), and when the command offset reaches 41, the updated checksum is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (step S2203, step S2207), the checksum value is initialized to generate a new checksum (step S2206). After the above processing, the process advances to step S2207.

In step S2207, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control section 350 are output to the medal number control section 350 (the I/O output port is updated). The information output here is received by the medal number control section 350 when the strobe signal is set to ON in step S2209 which will be described later.

In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal to the medal count control section 350 is off. If the strobe signal to the medal number control section 350 is OFF, the process proceeds to step S2209, and if the strobe signal to the medal number control section 350 is ON, the process proceeds to step S2210.

In step S2209, the strobe signal for the medal count control section 350 is set to ON, and this game control state command transmission processing is terminated.

In step S2210, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 are cleared, and the process proceeds to step S2211.

At step S2211, the strobe signal to the medal count control section 350 is set to OFF, and this game control state command transmission processing is terminated.

<<Medal number control unit main processing>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the medal count control section main processing executed by the CPU 354 of the medal count control section 350 will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the medal count control section.

As described above, the medal count control section 350 is provided with an activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs an activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the medal number control section main processing shown in FIG.

When power is turned on, power-on processing is first performed in step S301. Here, the WDT is initialized and restarted until the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined voltage (9 V) or higher, and when the power supply voltage reaches the predetermined voltage, access to the RAM 358 is permitted and an interrupt period is set. be done. In addition, communication circuit settings and the like are also performed.

In step S302, RAM abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S303. The details of this RAM abnormality determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S303, preparation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304. Details of this preparatory processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S304, processing for transmitting gaming machine information notification is executed, and the process proceeds to step S305. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S305, a count notification transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S306. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S306, reception confirmation processing of the rental notice is executed, and the process proceeds to step S307. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S307, if the rental notification reception flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S308, and if the same flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S304 again.

In step S308, a lending reception result response transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304 again. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 27 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG.

First, in step S3001 executed first, if the power status is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3002, and if the power status is other than "normal", the process proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3002, a checksum value is derived based on the data in RAM 358, and the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, the checksum value derived in step S3002 is compared with the checksum value derived at the time of power failure. , and if these values are different, it is determined that the checksum value is not normal, and the process advances to step S3005.

In step S3004, normal RAM clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3008. In this embodiment, there are four types of RAM clear processing, and as shown in FIG. 29, the normal RAM clear processing has the fewest clear targets. In the RAM 358, in addition to the area for storing information during the game, an area for storing hardware information such as a chip ID, an area for storing information on the state of the gaming machine such as the ratio of advantageous sections, and an area for storing information received from the game control unit 302 Although there is a buffer that temporarily stores the information that has been played, in normal RAM clear processing, the area that mainly stores the information during the game is cleared.

In step S3005, all RAM clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3006. Of the four types of RAM clear processing, the all-RAM clear processing has the largest number of objects to be cleared, and clears the entire area as shown in FIG.

In step S3006, information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as RAM failure information, and the process proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S3008.

In step S3008, if the number of game medals clear button 172 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S3009, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3009, the number of game medals is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S3010.

In step S3010, information indicating "detected" is set as game medal clear detection information, and the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3011, the power-on flag is set to ON.

In step S3012, execution of interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3013, this determination processing is repeatedly executed until the strobe signal ON from the game control unit 302 is detected, and when the strobe signal ON is detected, the process proceeds to step S3014.

In step S3014, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited.

In step S3015, the power-on flag is set to off.

In step S3016, it is determined whether or not the game control unit RAM clear command of the game control priority command shown in FIG. 13(a) has been received. If this command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3017; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3020.

At step S3017, if the information included in the game control unit RAM clear command is information indicating clearing "normal", the process proceeds to step S3018, and if not information indicating "normal", the process proceeds to step S3019.

In step S3018, limited (2) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 29, the areas excluding chip information, role ratio monitor information, and the like are cleared.

In step S3019, limited (1) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 29, the area excluding chip information and the like is cleared.

In step S3020, if the information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as the RAM failure information, the process proceeds to step S3021. do.

In step S3021, information (error code E8) indicating "RAM defect" is set as the error request set value.

In step S3022, error request setting processing is executed. The details of this error request setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the error request setting process (step S3022) in the RAM abnormality determination process and the like of FIG. 28 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 28 and the like.

First, in step S3101 executed first, if no error code is set in the error request, the process advances to step S3102, and if some error code is already set, this error request setting process ends.

In step S3102, the error request setting value (error code) is set as the error request.

In step S3103, if the error request is "E9" shown in FIG. 9B, the process proceeds to step S3104; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3104, the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3105, if the error request is "E7" shown in FIG. 9B, the process proceeds to step S3106; otherwise, this error request setting process ends.

At step S3106, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the error request setting process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 31, details of the preparation process (step S303) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 27 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG.

First, in step S3201 executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set to the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3202, the chip information (ID, manufacturer code, product code) of medal number control section 350 is updated. These pieces of information are stored in the ROM of the medal control section.

In step S3203, interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3204, while the game control chip ID acquisition flag is ON, this processing is repeatedly executed, and when the game control chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, the process proceeds to step S3205.

In step S3205, an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer.

In step S3206, an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer.

Next, details of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 27 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG.

First, in step S3301 executed first, this processing is repeatedly executed until the value of the game machine information notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3320.

In step S3302, an initial value (a value corresponding to 300.98 ms in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine information notification interval timer.

In step S3303, a value corresponding to 90 ms is set as the count notification interval timer value.

In step S3304, the value of the number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for count determination.

In step S3305, gaming machine information type acquisition processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3306, preparations for transmission of various game machine information corresponding to the game machine information type are performed. Specifically, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, the transmission of the gaming machine performance information is prepared, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, the transmission of the gaming machine installation information is prepared, and the game is played. If the device information type value is 2, preparations are made for transmission of hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information.

At step S3307, if the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the process proceeds to step S3308, and if the value of the gaming machine information type is other than 2, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3308, the number of inserted medals is set to zero.

In step S3309, the number of payout medals is set to zero.

At step S3310, the value of the number of game information is set to zero.

In steps S3311 to S3317, various types of gaming machine information (telegram length, command type, gaming machine information serial number, gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, checksum) (see FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b)) are sequentially transmitted. It should be noted that the checksum is a value updated based on the content of transmission up to that point.

In step S3318, the gaming machine information serial number is updated by one within the range of 1-255. Note that the value of the gaming machine information serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in the gaming machine information notification transmission process of FIG. 32 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG.

First, in step S3401 executed first, if the value of the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3402, an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer.

In step S3403, 1 is set to the gaming machine information type, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process is terminated.

At step S3404, 2 is set to the gaming machine information type, and the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3405, if the value of the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is 0, the process advances to step S3406, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the gaming machine information type acquisition processing ends.

In step S3406, an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer.

In step S3407, 0 is set to the gaming machine information type, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 34, the details of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 27 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the counting notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG.

First, in step S3501, which is executed first, this processing is repeatedly executed until the value of the count notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S3502.

In step S3502, an initial value (a value corresponding to 170 ms in this embodiment) is set to the rental notification interval timer.

From step S3503 to step S3505, the message length, command type, and counting serial number are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700. FIG.

In step S3506, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3507, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S3508, and if the same signal is off, the process proceeds to step S3513. This VL signal is a signal that is always sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state if normal.

In step S3508, if the number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process proceeds to step S3509, and if the number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process proceeds to step S3513.

In step S3509, the input prohibition flag is set to ON.

In step S3510, if the expected number of medals to be counted is equal to or greater than the number of game medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3511.

In step S3511, the value of the number of game medals for count determination is set as the counted number.

In step S3512, the number of sheets to be counted is set to the number of sheets to be counted.

In step S3513, the counted number of sheets is transmitted to the lending machine 700. FIG.

In step S3514, the value of the number of counted medals is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3515, the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3516, the input prohibition flag is set to off.

In step S3517, the value of the number of counted medals is added to the total number of medals counted.

In step S 3518 , the total number of medals counted is transmitted to the lending machine 700 .

In step S3519, the checksum is sent to the lending machine 700. FIG. The checksum value transmitted here is a value updated based on the data transmitted to the lending machine 700 in this count notification transmission process.

In step S3520, the counting serial number is updated by one within the range of 1-255. Note that the value of the count serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the lending notice reception confirmation process (step S306) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 27 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG.

First, in step S3601, which is executed first, if the lending notice reception flag is off, the flow advances to step S3602, and if the flag is on, this lending notice reception confirmation processing ends.

In step S3602, if the value of the rental notification interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3603, and if not 0, the process returns to step S3601.

At step S3603, if the VL signal is on, the flow advances to step S3604, and if the signal is off, this lending notice reception confirmation processing ends. This VL signal is a signal that is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state.

In step S3604, the value of the lending machine communication error counter is decremented by 1, and this lending notification reception confirmation processing ends.

Next, using FIG. 36, the details of the loan reception result response transmission process (step S308) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 27 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the loan reception result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG.

First, in step S3701 executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set in the lending machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3702, the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to off.

In step S3703, if the loaned number of sheets reception result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3704; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3707.

In step S3704, the value of the lending serial number is set to the normal lending serial number.

In step S3705, the value of the rental serial number is set as the rental serial number for confirmation. The check lending serial number is a value used for comparison with the next lending serial number (step S4104 in FIG. 39), and this step S3705 is provided in preparation for this comparison.

In step S3706, the lending serial number for confirmation is updated by one within the range of 1-255. Note that the value of the rental serial number for confirmation is 0 only when the power is turned on.

From step S3707 to step S3711, the message length, command type, normal lending serial number, lending number receipt result, and checksum) are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700 . Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the content of the previous transmission.

At step S3712, if the lending number receipt result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3712, and if it is other than "normal", this lending receipt result response transmission process ends.

In step S3713, standby processing is executed until the transmission in steps S3707 to S3711 is completed.

In step S3714, the number of loaned tokens is added to the number of game medals, and the lending reception result response transmission process is terminated.

《Timer interrupt processing of medal number control part》
Next, referring to FIG. 37, the medal count control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the medal count control unit 350 will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing of the medal number control unit.

The medal number control section 350 is provided with a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 0.745 ms in this embodiment). Interrupt processing is started at predetermined intervals.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU to the stack area is performed.

In step S402, the WDT is periodically activated (in this embodiment, the WDT count value does not exceed the initial set value and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). (Once every 0.745 ms, which is the interrupt period).

In step S403, input port state update processing (port reading) is performed. In this input port state update process, the input contents for the I/O input port are stored in the signal state storage area within the RAM 358 .

In step S404, lending notification reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S405, update processing of the planned number of sheets to be counted is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S406, a game control unit command reception process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S407, error monitoring processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S408, processing for transmitting a medal number control command addressed to the game control unit is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S409, a display device display process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S410, a timer update process is performed to update various timers in units of time.

In step S411, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S413, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S412. move on.

In step S412, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S401 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the medal count control section shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S413, information (return data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of the power failure, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 358, and the used area of the RAM 358 is saved. is derived and stored in RAM 358, and the power supply status is set to "normal". It should be noted that the same processing (step S214 in FIG. 23) is executed when the game control unit 302 detects the interruption of the power supply, but the processing here ends before the processing on the game control unit 302 side ends. If you do so, the command from the game control unit 302 cannot be received. In order to prevent such a problem from occurring in the present embodiment, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the processing here is terminated after the processing on the game control section 302 side is completed.

Next, the details of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in the timer interrupt process of the medal count control section of FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG.

First, in step S4001 executed first, the lending notice reception flag is set to off.

In step S4002, if a rental notification from the rental machine 700 has been received, the process advances to step S4003; otherwise, this rental notification reception processing ends.

In step S4003, the information in the RAM 358 is updated based on the received lending notice. That is, the data included in the rental notification is stored in RAM 358 .

In step S4004, a lending number determination process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4005, the determination result of step S4004 is set as the loan number receipt result.

In step S4006, the lending notice reception flag is set to ON, and this lending notice reception processing ends.

Next, using FIG. 39, the details of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in the lending notification reception process of FIG. 38 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG.

First, in step S4101, which is executed first, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

In step S4102, a checksum is calculated from the received rental notification data.

In step S4103, the checksum value included in the received rental notification is compared with the value calculated in step S4102. End the process.

In step S4104, the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notification is compared with the value of the lending serial number for confirmation stored in the RAM 358. If the two are equal, the flow advances to step S4105. End the number-of-sheets determination process. If the previous lending notice was normally received, the lending serial number for confirmation here will be the value set in steps S3705 and S3706 of FIG. 36 (updated lending serial number received last time). .

In step S4105, if each information of the message length and command type of the received rental notification is information corresponding to the rental notification, it is determined to be normal, and the process proceeds to step S4106. do.

In step S4106, if the value of the number of rented sheets included in the received rent notice is 0, the process proceeds to step S4111, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4107.

At step S4107, if the value of the number of game medals is less than 15000, the process proceeds to step S4108.

In step S4108, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine information type value of the previously transmitted gaming machine information notification is 2, that is, whether or not the gaming machine information notification is about hall control/illegal monitoring information. If the value is 2, the process advances to step S4109.

In step S4109, if the value of the number of counted sheets in the previously transmitted count notification is 0, the process proceeds to step S4110, and if the same value is not 0, this lending number determination processing ends.

In step S4110, if the value of the number of rented cards included in the received rent notification is 50 or less, the flow advances to step S4111, and if the same value is greater than 50, the loaned number determination processing ends.

In step S4111, the determination result is set to "normal", and the lending number determination process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 40, the details of the counted number update processing (step S405) in the timer interrupt processing of the medal count control unit of FIG. 37 will be described. 37. This figure is a flow chart of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted (step S405) in FIG.

First, in step S4201, which is executed first, if the power-on flag is on, the flow advances to step S4202, and if the flag is off, this update processing for the number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4202, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S4203, and if the same signal is off, the process proceeds to step S4213. This VL signal is a signal that is always sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state if normal.

In step S4203, if the counting button 171 is being operated, the process proceeds to step S4204, and if the same button is not being operated, the process proceeds to step S4210.

In step S4204, if the count long press flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4205, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4205, if the count long-press timer value is 0, the process proceeds to step S4206, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4206, an initial value (a value corresponding to 500 ms in this embodiment) is set to the value of the count long press timer, and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4207, if the count long-press timer value is 1, the process proceeds to step S4208, and if not 1, the process proceeds to step S4210.

In step S4208, the count long-press flag is set to ON.

In step S4209, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 50, and this planned number of sheets to be counted updating process ends.

In step S4210, if the count button 171 was operated immediately before (the count button 171 was released), the process proceeds to step S4211; otherwise, this update processing of the number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4211, if the count long-press flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4212, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4213.

In step S4212, 1 is added to the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted, and this planned number of sheets to be counted updating process is terminated.

In step S4213, the count long-press flag is set to off.

In step S4214, 0 is set to the value of the count long-press timer.

In step S4215, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted is cleared (set to 0), and this planned number of sheets to be counted updating process ends.

Next, using FIG. 41, the details of the game control unit command reception processing (step S406) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt processing of FIG. 37 will be described. The figure is a flow chart of the game control section command receiving process (step S406) in FIG.

First, in step S4301 executed first, if the switch from off to on of the strobe signal from the game control unit 302 is detected, proceed to step S4302, otherwise this game control unit command reception processing exit.

In step S4302, an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 190 ms) is set to the game control command disconnection timer.

In step S4303, if the received command is a game control state command, the process proceeds to step S4304, and if the received command is not the game control state command (game control priority command), the process proceeds to step S4305.

In step S4304, game control state command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4305, game control priority command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, using FIG. 42, details of the game control state command reception processing (step S4304) in the game control unit command reception processing of FIG. 41 will be described. The figure is a flowchart of the game control state command receiving process (step S4304) in FIG.

First, in step S4401, which is executed first, if the received command is a command to send a checksum, the process proceeds to step S4404; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4402. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted from the game control means to the medal number control section 350, and the final command is calculated from the contents of the previous 40 types of commands. It is a command to send sum. That is, for the 1st to 40th commands, the process proceeds to step S4402, and for the 41st command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4402, the contents of the command reception buffer are updated according to the contents of the received command.

In step S4403, the checksum is updated based on the content of the received command, and the game control state command receiving process is terminated.

In step S4404, the value of the checksum updated by the content of the 1st to 40th command in step S4403 and the value of the checksum included in the command received from the game control unit 302 are compared, and if both are equal, it is normal. It determines, it progresses to step S4405, and if both differ, this game control state command reception processing will be complete|finished.

In step S4405, the checksum value updated in step S4403 is cleared.

At step S4406, the value of the gaming machine status information buffer (the value of the gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 6A) among the contents of the command reception buffer is set in the RAM358.

At step S4407, if the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4408, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4410.

In step S4408, the acquired chip ID is acquired based on the information in the gaming machine installation information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer.

In step S4409, if the chip ID stored in RAM 358 and the acquired chip ID acquired in step S4408 match, the process proceeds to step S4410; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4414.

In step S4410, the value of the game machine installation information buffer (the value of the game machine installation information shown in FIG. 6C) among the contents of the command reception buffer is set in the RAM358.

In step S4411, the value of the role ratio monitor information buffer is set in the RAM 358 out of the contents of the command reception buffer.

At step S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information buffer is set in the RAM 358 out of the contents of the command reception buffer. The values of the gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 6B are set in the RAM 358 by steps S4411 and S4412.

In step S4413, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, and this game control state command reception process is terminated.

In step S4414, information indicating "chip ID number mismatch" (error code E7) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4415, the error request setting process of FIG. 30 is executed, and the game control state command reception process is terminated.

Next, the details of the game control priority command reception processing (step S4305) in the game control unit command reception processing of FIG. 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. These figures are flowcharts of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG.

First, in step S4501 executed first, if a triple command has been received, the process advances to step S4502, and if a command other than the triple command, the process advances to step S4514 in FIG. As described above, the triple command is a command composed of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in succession. is a triple command. That is, among the game control priority commands, if the above triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if the error occurrence command, RAM clear command, start lever reception command excluding these commands is received, the step of FIG. The process proceeds to S4514.

In step S4502, if the last command of the triple command is received, the process advances to step S4504; otherwise, the process advances to step S4503. In this embodiment, the last command of the triple command is a checksum, and the value of this checksum is calculated based on the contents of the commands excluding the last command. That is, for commands other than the last command, the process advances to step S4503 to store the contents thereof in the reception buffer, and when the last command is received, the process advances to step S4504.

In step S4504, information indicating "request" is set in the response command.

In step S4505, a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the reception buffer updated in step S4503.

In step S4506, the checksum value calculated in step S4505 and the checksum value included in the last command of the triple command are compared. If different, this game control priority command reception processing is terminated.

In step S4507, if the later-described game control command serial number update flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S4508, and if the same flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S4510.

In step S4508, the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer is set to the value of the game control command serial number.

In step S4509, the game control command serial number update flag is set to OFF.

Note that steps S4507 to S4509 are provided for initializing the command serial number for determination.

In step S4510, if the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer and the value of the game control command serial number (game control command serial number updated in the previous S4511 (command serial number for judgment)) are equal, step S4511 , and if the two are different, the process proceeds to step S4512.

In step S4511, 1 is added to the game control command serial number, and the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG.

In step S4512, information (error code E3) indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" is set as an error request setting value.

In step S4513, the error request setting process of FIG. 30 is executed, and this game control priority command reception process is terminated.

At step S4514 in FIG. 44, if the received command is a RAM clear command, the process proceeds to step S4515; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4516.

In step S4515, RAM clear command reception is executed. In this embodiment, nothing is executed here.

At step S4516, if the received command is an input command, the process proceeds to step S4517; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4518.

In step S4517, input command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

At step S4518, if the received command is a settlement command, the process proceeds to step S4519; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4520.

In step S4519, settlement command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

At step S4520, if the received command is a start lever acceptance command, the process proceeds to step S4521; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4522.

In step S4521, start lever acceptance command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

At step S4522, if the received command is a payout command, the process proceeds to step S4523; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4524.

In step S4523, a payout command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4523, error occurrence command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the input command receiving process (step S4517) in the game control priority command receiving process of FIGS. 43 and 44 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the input command reception process (step S4517) in FIG.

First, in step S4601 executed first, information indicating "request" is set in the response command.

At step S4602, if the input prohibition flag is off, the flow advances to step S4603, and if the flag is on, this input command reception process ends.

In step S4603, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

At step S4604, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than or equal to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the three consecutive commands), the process proceeds to step S4605; End the reception process.

In step S4605, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the number of inserted medals.

In step S4606, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the value of the current bet number.

In step S4607, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4608, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this input command reception process ends.

Next, using FIG. 46, the details of the settlement command reception processing (step S4519) in the game control priority command reception processing of FIGS. 43 and 44 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in FIG.

First, in step S4701, which is executed first, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the value of the current bet.

In step S4702, if the value of the current bet number is 0, the process proceeds to step S4703, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4703, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the number of inserted medals.

In step S4704, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the number of game medals.

In step S4705, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this settlement command reception process ends.

In step S4706, information (error code E6) indicating "unmatched number of sheets to be settled" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4707, the error request setting process of FIG. 30 is executed, and this settlement command reception process ends.

Next, using FIG. 47, the details of the start lever reception command reception processing (step S4521) in the game control priority command reception processing of FIGS. 43 and 44 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG.

First, in step S4801 executed first, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON.

At step S4802, if the game interval abnormality timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4803, and if the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4807.

In step S4803, an initial value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the value of the game interval abnormality timer.

In step S4804, the type information setting value is set to 11H (see FIG. 9A), and in subsequent step S4805 the received command value (the current bet number in the game control unit 302) is set to the count information setting value. be. The information set here is later included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the renting machine 700 .

In step S4806, game information setting processing is executed, and this start lever reception command reception processing is terminated. Details of the game information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4807, information (error code E5) indicating "game interval abnormality" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4808, the error request setting process of FIG. 30 is executed, and this start lever acceptance command reception process is terminated.

Next, details of the game information setting process (step S4806) in the start lever reception command reception process of FIG. 47 and the game information setting process (step S4A19) in the payout command reception process of FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the game information setting process (steps S4806, S4A19) in FIGS.

First, in step S4901, which is executed first, 1 is added to the number of game information.

At step S4902, if the number of game information is 1, the process proceeds to step S4903, and if the number of game information is not 1 (is 2), the process proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4903, as type information 1, the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 of FIG. 47 or step S4A14 of FIG. 49) is set.

In step S4904, the value of the count information set value is set as count information 1, and the game information setting process is terminated. Here, when the value set in step S4804 of FIG. 47 is set as type information 1, the value set in step S4805 is set, and the value set in step S4A14 of FIG. 49 is set as type information 1. is set, the value set in step S4A16 or step S4A18 is set.

In step S4905, the value of the type information set value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 47) is set as type information 2. FIG.

At step S4906, the value of the count information set value (the value set at step S4805 in FIG. 47) is set as count information 2, and the game information setting process is terminated.

Note that the type information 2 and the count information 2 are provided for transmitting information on both of them in case the game is started quickly after the payout (within the period of transmission to the lending machine 700). It is a thing. That is, when the payout information (step S4A14 in FIG. 49, etc.) is set in the type information 1 and the count information 1, the current betting information (step S4804 in FIG. 47, etc.) is set to the type information 2 and the count information 2 may be set to It should be noted that, from the start of the game to the payout, the reels rotate and stop, and even if there is type information or count information during that time, it will be transmitted to the lending machine 700 (cleared). 2 and the count information is never set to 2.

Next, using FIG. 49, the details of the payout command receiving process (step S4523) in the game control priority command receiving process of FIGS. 43 and 44 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the payout command receiving process (step S4523) in FIG.

First, in step S4A01 that is executed first, game medal clear detection information is cleared.

At step S4A02, if the payout command acquisition flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S4A03, and if the flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S4A09.

In step S4A03, if the replay has been won, the process proceeds to step S4A04, and if the regame has not been won, the process proceeds to step S4A05.

In step S4A04, 0 is set to the additional value for the number of game medals.

In step S4A05, information (error code E4) indicating "abnormal number of payouts" is set as the error request set value.

In step S4A06, if the value of the received command (the value contained in the first command among the triple commands) is 15 or less, the process proceeds to step S4A07, and if the value is greater than 15, the process proceeds to step S4A10.

In step S4A07, the value of the number of payout medals is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands).

In step S4A08, the game medal addition value is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands).

In step S4A09, information (error code E2) indicating "abnormal game order" is set as the error request set value.

In step S4A10, the error request setting process of FIG. 30 is executed, and this payout command reception process is terminated.

In step S4A11, game medal overflow confirmation processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

At step S4A12, if the information of the response command indicates "normal", the process proceeds to step S4A13; otherwise, this payout command reception process is terminated.

In step S4A13, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF.

In step S4A14, 21H (see FIG. 9A) is set as the type information set value.

In step S4A15, if the player wins the replay role, the process proceeds to step S4A18, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4A16.

In step S4A16, the value of the received command (the value contained in the first command among the triple commands) is set as the count information set value. The first command of the payout commands here includes the number of payouts in the game control unit 302, and the number of payouts is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is transmitted to the rental machine 700 together with the type information setting value included in the gaming machine information.

At step S4A17, the current bet number is set to zero.

In step S4A18, the value of the current bet number is set as the count information set value. The information set here is transmitted to the rental machine 700 together with the type information setting value included in the gaming machine information.

At step S4A19, the game information setting process of FIG. 48 is executed, and this payout command receiving process is terminated.

Next, details of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in the payout command reception process of FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the game medal count overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG.

First, in step S4B01 executed first, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4B02, the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is set as the addition result.

In step S4B03, if the value of the addition result is 16383 or less, the process proceeds to step S4B04, and if the value of the addition result is greater than 16383, this game medal number overflow confirmation processing is terminated.

In step S4B04, the value of the addition result is set to the number of game medals.

In step S4B05, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this game medal count overflow confirmation process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 51, the details of the error occurrence command reception processing (step S4524) in the game control priority command reception processing of FIGS. 43 and 44 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG.

First, in step S4C01 executed first, an error request is cleared. When an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error on the medal number control unit 350 side is cleared by the processing here, so the error of the game control unit 302 is preferentially processed.

In step S4C02, if information (error code E1) indicating "game control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C03.

At step S4C03, if the received command contains information indicating "abnormal game order" (error code E2), the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C04.

At step S4C04, if information (error code E3) indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C05.

In step S4C05, if the received command contains information indicating "medal number control RAM error" (error code E8), the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C06.

In step S4C06, if information (error code E0) indicating "medal number control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C07.

At step S4C07, if information (error code rE) indicating "game control RAM failure" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, this error generation command reception process ends.

In step S4C08, the game control command serial number update flag is set to ON, and the error occurrence command reception process is terminated. By setting this flag to ON, the command serial number for determination is initialized (step S4508 in FIG. 43).

Next, the details of the error monitoring process (step S407) in the timer interrupt process of the medal count control unit in FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG.

First, in step S4D01 executed first, if the value of the game control command disconnection timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D02, and if the same value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D02, information (error code E1) indicating "game control disconnection" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D03, the error request setting process of FIG. 30 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D04, if the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D05, and if the value is not 1, this error monitoring process ends.

In step S4D05, if the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4D06, and if the flag is on, the error monitoring process ends.

In step S4D06, information (error code E9) indicating "rental machine communication error" is set as the error request set value.

In step S4D07, the error request setting process of FIG. 30 is executed, and the error monitoring process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, details of the game control section addressed medal number control command transmission process (step S408) in the medal number control section timer interrupt process of FIG. 37 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the game control unit addressed medal count control command transmission process (step S408) in FIG.

First, in step S4E01 that is executed first, information on the VL signal is updated.

In step S4E02, if the above-described power-on flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4E03, and if the same flag is on, this game control unit addressed medal count control command transmission process is terminated.

In step S4E03, if the value of the strobe counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S4E04, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4E09.

In step S4E04, some response command to be transmitted to the game control unit 302 (response command set in either the insertion command reception process of FIG. 45, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 46 or the payout command reception process of FIG. 49) is set. If not, the process proceeds to step S4E05, and if any response command is set, the process proceeds to step S4E07.

In step S4E05, the command offset is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 6 (1 after 6). In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the medal number control state commands (six types of commands) described with reference to FIG. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be transmitted.

In step S4E06, the command corresponding to the command offset and the target information of this command are read out to generate transmission contents, and the transmission contents are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302. When transmitting the information on the number of game medals, this value is divided into upper bytes and lower bytes and transmitted using two of the six types of commands. Among them, the value of the number of game medals obtained when the previous command was transmitted is used.

In step S4E07, the response command set in either the insertion command reception process of FIG. 45, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 46, or the payout command reception process of FIG.

In step S4E08, the response command set in any one of the insertion command reception process of FIG. 45, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 46, or the payout command reception process of FIG. 49 is cleared.

In step S4E09, if the value of the strobe counter is 3 or less, the process proceeds to step S4E10, and if the value is greater than 3, the process proceeds to step S4E11.

In step S4E10, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to ON.

In step S4E11, the content of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 is cleared.

In step S4E12, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S4E13.

At step S4E13, the value of the strobe counter is incremented by one. This value is repeatedly updated within the range of 0 to 7 (0 after 7).

In step S4E14, the content of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 is output to the game control unit 302, and the processing for transmitting the medal number control command addressed to the game control unit ends. The information output here is received by the game control unit 302 when the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to ON.

Next, using FIG. 54, the details of the indicator display processing (step S409) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt processing of FIG. 37 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the display unit display process (step S409) in FIG.

First, in step S4F01 executed first, if the value of the number of game medals is different from the value of the number of display game medals, the process proceeds to step S4F02, and if the two values are the same, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F02, if the value of the discrete timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4F03, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F03, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F04, and if the value of the number of game medals is smaller than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F05.

In step S4F04, 1 is added to the number of display game medals.

In step S4F05, 1 is subtracted from the number of display game medals.

In step S4F06, a value corresponding to 4 ms is set as the value of the discrete timer.

In step S4F07, the number of game medals for display is displayed, and this display device display processing is terminated.

<<Modification 1>>
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as Modified Example 1) of the medal insertion process will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. FIG. FIG. 55 is a modification of the medal insertion process of FIG. 17, FIG. 56 is a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 20, and FIG. 57 is a modification of the insertion command reception process of FIG. be.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 55, step S1121 is provided between steps S1107 and S1108 in the processing shown in FIG. 17, and step S1122 is provided between steps S1109 and S1110. Further, steps S1112 and S1113 in FIG. 17 are deleted and step S1123 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S1121, the input number limitation flag is set to ON.

In step S1122, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF.

In step S1123, the value of the content of the response is added to the value of the current bet.

In the modification shown in FIG. 56, step S1402 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG. 20, and step S1421 is provided. This processing will be described below.

In step S1421, information on the requested number of medals and the input number limitation flag is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control section 350. FIG.

In the modification shown in FIG. 57, step S4603 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG. Moreover, steps S4621, S4622, and S4623 are newly provided after the No route in the judgment of step S4604, and step S4608 is deleted and step S4624 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S4621, the information of the input number limitation flag included in the received command (the first command among the three consecutive commands) is referred to. If the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4622. The process advances to step S4623.

In step S4622, for the received command value storing the value of the requested number included in the received command (the first command of the triple commands), that value is set as the number of game medals, and the process proceeds to step S4605.

In step S4623, the received command value storing the requested number of sheets included in the received command (the first command of the triple command) is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S4624.

In step S4624, the received command value is set in the response command, and this input command receiving process ends.

<<Modification 2>>
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 2) of the update processing of the planned number of sheets to be counted will be described with reference to FIG. 58 . FIG. 58 is a modification of the planned number update process of FIG.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 58, step S4204 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG. Further, step S4206 is deleted and step S4221 is provided, and step S4209 is deleted and step S4222 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S4221, the value of the long-press timer is set according to the pressing time of the counting button 171. FIG.

In step S4222, the number of sheets to be counted is set according to the pressing time of the counting button 171. FIG.

<<Modification 3>>
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 3) of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted will be described with reference to FIG. 59 . FIG. 59 is a modification of the scheduled number update process of FIG.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 59, steps S4231 and S4232 are provided before step S4207 in the processing shown in FIG. Moreover, steps S4233 and S4234 are newly provided after the No route in the judgment of step S4207, and steps S4235 and S4236 are provided before step S4210. Further, step S4237 is provided after step S4215. These processes will be described below.

In step S4231, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4232, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4232, the value of the automatic counting timer is set to a value corresponding to 2.0 seconds, and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4233, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4234, and if not 1, the process proceeds to step S4235.

In step S4234, the automatic count flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4235, if the automatic counting flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4210, and if the same flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4236.

In step S4236, if the number of game medals is 0, the process proceeds to step S4213, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4237, the automatic counting flag is set to OFF, and this update processing of the planned number of sheets to be counted ends.

<<Processing of the first sub-controller 400>>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 60(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 60(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S501, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S503, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S507, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302, is executed. The details of this command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 60(d).

In step S509, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S511, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S513, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command to various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S515, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a shutter control instruction in the effect data read out in step S509, the shutter control corresponding to this instruction is performed.

In step S517, information output processing is performed to set the transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a control command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the performance data read out in step S509, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S503.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 60(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing executed when the first sub-control section 400 detects a strobe signal output by the game control section 302 . In step S521 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the game control unit 302 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 60(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S531, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 60(a), and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S533, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S515, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

Next, details of command processing (step S507) in the first sub-control unit main processing of FIG. 60(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 60(d). This figure is a flow chart of the command processing (step S507) in FIG. 60(a).

First, in step S541 executed first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S543; otherwise, the command processing is terminated.

In step S543, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302, is executed.

<<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 61(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 61(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 61(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 61(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S603, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S605.

In step S605, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S607, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S609, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the performance data read out in step S609, the image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S603.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 61(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S615 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 61(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S617, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 61(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S619, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S611 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 61(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S621, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S623, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S625; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S625, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S621, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S627, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S629, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S631, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<<Description of operation>>
The operation of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below.

[Operation at power-on]
In the medal count control unit 350, the contents of the RAM are backed up when the power is turned off. When it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, normal RAM clear processing is performed, and the state at the time of power off is restored (Yes in step S3003 of FIG. 28). When the power is turned on for the first time, the initial state is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, all RAM clear is executed (determination of No in step S3003 in FIG. 28). Furthermore, information indicating "RAM failure" is stored in the RAM failure information, so that information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set in the error request (Yes in steps S3006 and S3020 of FIG. 28). determination, step S3102 in FIG. 30). This error information is transmitted to the game control unit 302 (FIG. 53), and error notification based on this information is executed (step S1002 in FIGS. 25 and 16). The game control unit 302 does not clear the contents of the RAM even if an error is received from the medal count control unit 350. FIG. Furthermore, in the medal number control unit 350, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, so that various information is updated (initialized) when the game control unit state command is received (see FIG. 28). step S3007, step S4407 in FIG. 42).

Also, when the power is turned on, a RAM clear command may be transmitted from the game control unit 302 (step S101 in FIG. 15). The medal count control section 350 that receives this RAM clear command employs a configuration that clears the RAM in response to the RAM clear command from the game control section 302 (Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 28). In this case, the medal number control unit 350 temporarily permits the interrupt processing, and then, upon receiving a command from the game control unit 302, prohibits the interrupt processing and performs subsequent processing. It is possible to reliably execute the processing when it is received (steps S3012 to S3014 in FIG. 28). Further, by setting the power-on flag to OFF while the interrupt is enabled, the counting process by operating the counting button 171 is not executed (steps S3011 and S3015 in FIG. 28).

In addition, the number of game medals can be initialized in the medal number control unit 350 by operating the number of game medals clear button 172 when the power is turned on (determination of YES in step S3008 in FIG. 28). At this time, information indicating "detected" is set in the game medal count clear detection information. (FIG. 32). The game medal number clear detection information is cleared when a payout command is received from the game control unit 302 (step S4A01 in FIG. 49).

[Game control state command transmission (regular transmission from game control unit 302 to medal count control unit 350)]
In the slot machine 100 , 41 types of game control state commands (see FIG. 10) are transmitted to the medal count control section 350 . Specifically, in the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the game control unit timer interrupt processing of the game control unit 302, the game control state commands are sequentially transmitted one by one to the medal number control unit. It is set in the buffer (Yes in step S2201 of FIG. 26). However, when the game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 first, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

After the game control state command and the game control priority command are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350, the contents of this transmission buffer are output and the strobe signal is set to ON (step S2208 in FIG. 26). judgment of Yes). By setting this strobe signal to ON, the medal number control section 350 receives the command. The strobe signal is set to OFF in the next interrupt process, and the contents of the transmission buffer are also cleared (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 26), but the output from the I/O port is maintained as it is. . This makes it possible to stabilize reception of commands on the medal number control section 350 side. Then, when the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared, the contents of the transmission buffer are updated in order to transmit a new command in the next interrupt processing (Yes in step S2201 of FIG. 26). That is, in the game control unit 302, one command is transmitted while two interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched each time the interrupt process is executed. In addition, the transmission state continues for 1.49 ms (however, the output of the command itself continues for 2.98 ms), whereas the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (0.745 ms interrupt processing twice). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command from being missed.

[Game control priority command transmission (interrupt transmission from game control unit 302 to medal number control unit 350)]
In the game control unit 302, a game control state command is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 in timer interrupt processing, but the game control priority command is given priority according to the state of the game in the game control unit main processing. It is sent to the number control unit 350 . More specifically, when the transmission buffer becomes empty in the process of the game control command transmission process (FIG. 26), the game control command transmission process in the next timer interrupt process is executed (the next game control state command is is set in the transmission buffer), by setting the game control priority command in the transmission buffer in the game control unit main processing, this game control priority command is given priority over the game control state command and the number of medals control unit 350. Game control priority commands include an insertion command associated with the operation to insert game medals, a settlement command associated with the operation to settle game medals currently set in the number of bets, a start lever acceptance command associated with acceptance of start lever operation, and a game medal There are a payout command associated with payout, an error occurrence command associated with error occurrence, and a RAM clear command associated with RAM clear (FIG. 13(a)).

Among the game control priority commands, the input command, the settlement command, and the payout command each consist of three commands. Among these, the first command is a command containing information on the number of game medals to be targeted, the second command is a command containing the communication number (command serial number) of the game control priority command, and the third command is the previous command. A command containing a checksum based on the contents of two commands. Since these commands are sent consecutively without being interrupted by other commands, they are sometimes referred to as triple commands. Also, the values of the high-order bytes of the triple command are consecutive values.

If the response command from the medal number control section 350 is not received, or if the response command from the medal number control section 350 includes information indicating "request", the command is resent. (Determination of No in step S1308 of FIG. 19, determination of No in step S1310), if the upper limit number of retransmissions is exceeded, information indicating "abnormality" is set as a response result from the medal count control unit 350. (NO in steps S1302 and S1306).

In addition, when information other than "request" is included in the response command from the medal number control section 350, this information is set in the response result from the medal control section, and the command serial number is incremented by 1 (Fig. 19 steps S1311 and S1312).

[Operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (transmission of the insertion command, etc.)]
When a game medal insertion operation is performed, the number of game medals requested by this operation (requested number) is determined (steps S1105 to S1109 in FIG. 17). In this embodiment, it is possible to perform a betting operation using two types of bet buttons, ie, a 1 bet button and a MAX bet button. When the MAX bet button is operated, the number of game medals required for setting the maximum number of bets is set as the requested number (step S1107 in FIG. 17), and when the 1 bet button is operated, 1 is added to the requested number. It is set (step S1109 in FIG. 17). However, when the current bet amount is the maximum bet amount, the required number of bets is set to 0 by the input operation (No in step S1106 of FIG. 17).

Subsequently, a command (the first command among the commands constituting the insertion command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is an insertion command and lower byte data indicating the value of the number of requested medals is sent to the medal count control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1110 and S1111 in FIG. 17, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 20, and FIG. 21). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and is set in the transmission buffer first. command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

After that, when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission processing of the next game control unit timer interrupt processing (No judgment in step S2208 in FIG. 26), the checksum is updated, and 1 is added to the upper byte data. It is added and updated to the value indicating the second command, and the command (the second command among the commands constituting the input command) consisting of lower byte data indicating the command serial number is stored in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set (steps S1404 to S1407 in FIG. 20, FIG. 21). Then, in the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the next game control unit timer interrupt processing, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the next game control unit timer interrupt When the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission processing of the processing (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 26), the checksum is updated, and furthermore, 1 is added to the upper byte data to indicate the third command. value, and a command (the third command among the commands constituting the insertion command) consisting of lower byte data indicating the checksum is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (step S1408 in FIG. 20). ˜S1411, FIG. 21). Then, the commands in the transmission buffer are transmitted to the medal count control section 350 in the next game control command transmission processing of the game control section timer interrupt processing (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26).

The insertion command is transmitted to the medal count control section 350 in the above flow. is added (Yes in step S1112 of FIG. 17).

In addition, when the replay role is won and the replay is given (the replay flag is ON), the processing of the input command is not executed (determination of No in step S1104 of FIG. 17).

Also, during the period from when the input command is transmitted until when the response command is received from the medal count control unit 350, the input command is not transmitted even if the bet button is operated (step S1112 in FIG. 17 is the response command received). (Wait until the

Also, when the bet button is operated, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 regardless of whether or not a response command to the input command is received, and regardless of the contents of the response command from the medal count control section 350. (step S1114 in FIG. 17). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the bet button.

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to settlement operation (transmission of settlement command, etc.)]
When the insertion operation is performed, the current bet amount is added accordingly, but by operating the settlement button 134 (settlement operation), the game medals set to the current bet amount can be settled.

When the settlement operation is performed, the value of the current bet amount is set as the number of game medals requested in the settlement operation (No in step S1101 of FIG. 17, step S1203 of FIG. 18).

Subsequently, a command (the first of the commands constituting the settlement command) consisting of upper byte data indicating the settlement command and lower byte data indicating the requested number of sheets is sent to the medal count control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1204 and S1205 in FIG. 18, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 20, and FIG. 21). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and is set in the transmission buffer first. command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

Subsequently, the second and third commands among the commands that make up the settlement command are transmitted, but since this processing is the same as that for the input command, the description thereof will be omitted.

The settlement command is transmitted to the medal number control section 350 in the above flow. If the response command to this command includes information indicating "normal", the value of the current bet number is set to 0. It is set (determination of Yes in step S1206 of FIG. 18).

In the above example, the value of the current bet becomes 0 after receiving the response command (when the response command indicating "normal" is received, the value of the current bet is decremented). In the state before receiving the response command, the current bet value has not been subtracted. On the other hand, since the number of game medals is added in the medal number control section 350 which received the settlement command, the number of game medals owned by the player is temporarily increased at this point. If no response command indicating "normal" is received, the value of the current bet is not decremented and an error occurs (No judgment in step S1206 in FIG. 18), but this error is avoided by some means. In this case, the value of the current bet amount is not subtracted. As a result, the number of medals increases by the amount added to the number of game medals by the medal number control unit 350, and the game medals are obtained illegally by the settlement operation. It will be. Therefore, the current bet value may be set to 0 before and after the settlement command is transmitted, and a configuration may be adopted in which a response command to the settlement command is not waited for (response command not used). In addition, although there is a possibility that errors in the communication state cannot be detected in this configuration that does not use the response command, communication quality is not degraded because errors in the communication state can be detected by adopting a configuration that uses the response command for the input command. can be made It should be noted that command indexes may be managed between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350, and an error may occur when the number of mismatches reaches a predetermined number (eg, 5 times). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent an operation based on incorrect information.

Note that, when receiving a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding the number of inserted medals, the medal number control unit 350 may not accept the settlement and give an error. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of game medals.

Note that, when receiving a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16, the medal number control unit 350 may not accept the settlement and give an error. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of game medals.

Incidentally, when the medal number control section 350 receives a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16384, the settlement may not be accepted and an error may be made. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of game medals.

In addition, when the replay role is won and the replay is given (the replay flag is ON), the processing of the settlement command is not executed (determination of No in step S1202 in FIG. 18).

Also, when the settlement button 134 is operated, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 regardless of whether or not the settlement command has been transmitted, and regardless of the content of the response command from the medal count control section 350 ( Step S1201 in FIG. 18). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the checkout button 134 .

[Operation of game control unit 302 by start lever operation (transmission of start lever reception command, etc.)]
If the start lever is operated while the current bet value is equal to or greater than the startable number, the upper byte data indicating the start lever acceptance command and the lower byte data indicating the current bet value (start lever acceptance command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1012 to S1014 in FIG. 16). Further, a start lever acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 (step S1014 in FIG. 16). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the start lever.

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]
When the game ends and a winning combination with a payout is won, the value of the number of payouts is set to the number of game medals requested for the payout (requested number of medals) (step S1602 in FIG. 22). Subsequently, a command (the first of the commands constituting the payout command) consisting of upper byte data indicating the payout command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of coins is sent to the medal count control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 20, and FIG. 21). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and is set in the transmission buffer first. command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

Subsequently, the second and third commands among the commands that make up the payout command are transmitted, but since this processing is the same as that of the input command, the explanation is omitted.

The payout command is transmitted to the medal count control section 350 in the above flow. command is transmitted (step S1607 in FIG. 22). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the payout.

On the other hand, if the response command is "abnormal" and nothing is set in the error request, the number of game medals overflows and the payout cannot be accepted. 1 is transmitted to the sub-controller 400 (step S1608 in FIG. 22). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the overflow. It should be noted that, if the overflow state is not resolved, retransmission of the payout command is repeated, and the game cannot proceed. In this case, the overflow state can be resolved by operating the count button 171 . When the overflow state is resolved, an effect corresponding to the payout is executed and the game can proceed. In other words, when the game cannot be progressed due to overflow, the player himself/herself can deal with it without calling a clerk.

[Operation when medal count control command is received]
When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal number control unit 350 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S2101 in FIG. 25), the type of this command (game control state command (FIG. 11) or response command (FIG. 13 (b)) is identified, and the content of the RAM 308 is updated according to the command type (step S2102 in FIG. 25). Also, if the command received here is a command containing an error code, on condition that the error status in the game control unit 302 is not set, this error code is an error in the game control unit 302 The status is set (step S2104 in FIG. 25).

[Send medal count control command (from medal count control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]
In the slot machine 100, six types of medal count control state commands (see FIG. 11) are transmitted to the game control section 302. FIG. Specifically, one medal number control state command is issued by the medal number control command transmission processing to the game control unit (step S408 in FIG. 37, FIG. 53) of the medal number control unit timer interrupt processing of the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit one by one (determination of Yes in step S4E04 of FIG. 53). However, when the response command is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 first, the medal number control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (determination of No in step S4E04 of FIG. 53).

The medal number control state command and response command set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are then output to the game control unit 302 (step S4E14 in FIG. 53). In this state, if the strobe signal is set to ON (step S4E10 in FIG. 53), the game control section 302 side will receive the command. In managing the on/off of the strobe signal, a strobe counter that adds 1 for each interrupt within the range of 0 to 7 is used. 4 to 7 are set to OFF (steps S4E09 and S4E13 in FIG. 53). The transmission buffer is updated when the strobe counter is 0 (step S4E03 in FIG. 53). That is, in the medal number control section 350, one command is transmitted while the interrupt processing is executed eight times, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched every time the interrupt processing is executed four times. . In addition, the transmission state continues for 2.98 ms (0.745 ms x 4 times), whereas the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (1.49 ms interrupt processing twice), so the command It is possible to prevent spillage.

[Operation when game control state command is received]
In the medal number control unit 350, when a command is received from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 41), if this command is a game control state command, game control state command reception processing (FIG. 41 , step S4304, FIG. 42).

As for the game control state command, 41 types of commands (FIG. 10) are sequentially transmitted, but the 1st to 40th commands are temporarily stored in the buffer and the checksum is updated (No in step S4401 of FIG. 42). judgment). When the 41st command (checksum) is received, if the content is normal, the checksum is cleared, and the RAM is updated based on the information temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4406 in FIG. 42, S4410 to S4413). However, when updating the gaming machine installation information buffer, role ratio monitor information buffer, and gaming machine performance information buffer, it is executed when the chip ID stored in the RAM matches the chip ID in the gaming machine installation information buffer. (Yes in step S4409 of FIG. 42). If the IDs do not match, an error code E7 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4409 in FIG. 42). Also, when all the RAMs are cleared in the medal count control unit 350, the chip IDs stored in the RAM have already been cleared. update processing is executed (game control unit chip ID acquisition flag ON in FIG. 28, determination of No in step S4407 in FIG. 42).

[Operation when game control priority command is received]
In the medal number control unit 350, when a command is received from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 41), if this command is a game control priority command, game control priority command reception processing (FIG. 41 43, 44) are executed.

First, if the game control priority command is not a triple command (RAM clear command, start lever reception command, error occurrence command), processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 44).

On the other hand, if the game control priority command is a triple command (insertion command, settlement command, payout command), the first and second commands are once stored in the buffer (step S4503 in FIG. 43), the third command , the checksum value included in this command is compared with the checksum calculated from the contents previously stored in the buffer. (steps S4504 to S4606 in FIG. 43).

Next, if the game control command serial number update flag is ON, the game control command serial number is updated to the value of the command serial number stored in the reception buffer, and the game control command serial number update flag is set to OFF (Fig. 43 determination of Yes in step S4507). It should be noted that the game control command serial number update flag is a flag that is set to ON in order to prevent a situation in which a command serial number error occurs separately after the error is resolved (FIG. 51).

Next, it is determined whether or not the game control command serial number and the command serial number stored in the reception buffer match (step S4510 in FIG. 43). Since the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 both add 1 to the command serial number (step S1312 in FIG. 19, step S4511 in FIG. 43), these values will match if there is no abnormality. If these values do not match, the error code E3 is set in the error request (No determination in step S4510 in FIG. 43).

After the above processing, processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 44).

[Operation when input command is received]
When the received game control priority command is an input command, an input command reception process is executed (step S4517 in FIG. 44, FIG. 45). In this processing, if the value included in the insertion command (hereinafter referred to as the requested number of inserted medals) is within the number of game medals, the requested number of inserted medals is added to the number of inserted medals, the requested number of inserted medals is added to the current bet number, After the requested number of medals to be inserted is subtracted from the number of game medals, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes in step S4604 of FIG. 45). When the requested number of inserted medals is larger than the number of game medals, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (determination of No in steps S4603 and S4604 in FIG. 45). The number of inserted medals is a value used in the gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 32).

Note that while the counting notification transmission process is being executed, the input prohibition flag is set to ON (step S3509 in FIG. 34). It is set (determination of No in steps S4601 and S4602 in FIG. 45).

[Operation when settlement command is received]
When the received game control priority command is the settlement command, settlement command reception processing is executed (step S4519 in FIG. 44, FIG. 46). In this process, the value included in the settlement command (hereinafter referred to as settlement request number) is subtracted from the current bet amount (step S4701 in FIG. 46). If the current bet amount is 0, the number of bills requested for settlement is subtracted from the number of inserted medals, and after the number of bills requested for settlement is added to the number of game medals, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command. (Yes determination in step S4702 of FIG. 46). The number of inserted medals is a value used in the gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 32). If the current bet number is not 0, an error code E6 is set as an error request (NO in step S4702 of FIG. 46).

[Operation when the start lever acceptance command is received]
When the received game control priority command is the start lever acceptance command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON (step S4801 in FIG. 47). If this flag is not set to ON, an error may occur in the subsequent payout command reception process, and fraud prevention may be discovered. Next, if the value of the game interval abnormality timer is 0 (determination of Yes in step S4802 in FIG. 47), the initial value is set to the game interval abnormality timer (step S4803 in FIG. 47), and the game information is set. processing is executed (steps S4804 to S4806 in FIG. 47). Here, 11H is set as the type information set value, and this value indicates the acceptance of the start lever. Also, the current bet number is set as the count information set value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals used by accepting the start lever is stored as game information. The gaming information is information used for gaming machine information transmitted to the renting machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 32). Incidentally, when the game interval abnormality timer is not 0, an error code E5 is set as an error request (determination of No in step S4802 in FIG. 47). This game interval abnormality timer is a timer similar to the game interval counter (step S106 in FIG. 15) in the game control unit 302. By using this timer also in the medal count control unit 350 separately from the game control unit 302, preventing fraud.

[Operation when receiving payout command]
When the received game control priority command is a payout command, the number of game medals clear detection information is first cleared. This information is information set by operating the number of game medals clear button 172 when the power is turned on, and this information is transmitted to the lending machine 700 until it is cleared when this payout command is received. ing.

Next, if the payout command acquisition flag is not ON, an error code E2 is set as an error request (determination of No in step S4A02 of FIG. 49). This flag is a flag that is set to ON when the start lever acceptance command is received, so if this flag is OFF, it means that the payout command has been received even though the start lever acceptance command has not been received. Used for fraud prevention.

Next, if the player has won the replay, 0 is set to the game medal addition value (step S4A04 in FIG. 49). In cases other than replay wins, if the value included in the payout command (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) is 15 or less, the number of payouts and the additional value for the number of game medals are set to the number of payouts (FIG. 49). steps S4A07, S4A08). The number of paid-out medals is a value used in the gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3309 in FIG. 32). If the payout number is greater than 15, an error code E4 is set as an error request (NO in steps S4A05 and S4A06 of FIG. 49).

Subsequently, game medal count overflow confirmation processing is executed (step S4A11 in FIG. 49, FIG. 50). Here, if the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is 16383 or less, which is the upper limit value of the number of game medals for payout, this total value is taken as the number of game medals, and "normal" is indicated in the response command. Information is set (determination of Yes in step S4B03 of FIG. 50). On the other hand, if the total value is greater than the upper limit value of the number of game medals, the number of game medals is maintained as it is, and information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (determination of No in step S4B03 of FIG. 50). Regarding the determination of the number of game medals here, as will be described later (see [Rental notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]), in the actual operation, the number of game medals is the actual threshold value. If the actual threshold value is exceeded, the output cannot be increased (response command "abnormal"), and if the actual threshold is not exceeded, the output can be increased (response command "normal"). Any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (16383 in this embodiment), and for example, the actual threshold does not need to be the same as the determination value for processing.

If information indicating “abnormality” is set in the response command in the game medal number overflow confirmation process, the payout command reception process is terminated, and this response command is transmitted to the game control unit 302 .

On the other hand, if information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF (step S4A13 in FIG. 49). Further, processing for setting game information is executed (steps S4A14 to S4A19 in FIG. 49). Here, 21H is set as the type information set value, and this value indicates that there was a payout. Also, the number of payouts (the current number of bets in the case of a replay win) is set as the count information set value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals obtained by payout is stored as game information. The gaming information is information used for gaming machine information transmitted to the renting machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 32).

[Notification of gaming machine information (periodic transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control section 350, the gaming machine information notification is transmitted in the medal number control section main processing (step S304 in FIG. 27, FIG. 32). This gaming machine information notification is configured to be executed at approximately 300 ms intervals by a gaming machine information notification interval timer (steps S3301 and S3302 in FIG. 32). In addition, 90 ms is set to the counting notification interval timer for adjusting the time until the counting notification executed after the game machine information notification is transmitted (step S3303 in FIG. 32).

Next, the value of the current number of game medals is set in the number of game medals for count determination. In the slot machine 100, since the number of game medals may change when performing the counting process (moving the number of game medals from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700), the value for the counting process is temporarily changed. is set to the number of game medals for counting determination (step S3304 in FIG. 32).

Next, the gaming machine information type is acquired (step S3305 in FIG. 32, FIG. 33). The gaming machine information notification includes gaming machine information, and as this gaming machine information, one of three types of gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information is selected (FIG. 8). (b)). Specifically, when the gaming machine information type is 0, the gaming machine performance information is selected, when the gaming machine information type is 1, the gaming machine installation information is selected, and when it is 2, the hall controller/fraud monitoring information is selected. Here, one of 0, 1, and 2 is set as the gaming machine information type using the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer and the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer (FIG. 33). In this embodiment, the gaming machine information type is set to 1 at intervals of about 60 seconds, the gaming machine information type is set to 0 at intervals of about 180 seconds, and otherwise 2 is set to the gaming machine information type. . That is, in the game machine information notification with a cycle of about 300 ms, the game machine information mainly includes hall control/fraud monitoring information, but the game machine installation information is included in the game machine information at intervals of about 60 seconds, and the game machine information is notified at intervals of about 180 seconds. The gaming machine performance information is included in the gaming machine information at intervals. Data to be notified of gaming machine information (FIGS. 8A and 8B), including gaming machine information corresponding to these gaming machine information types, is set in the lending machine destination transmission buffer (step S3306 in FIG. 32). ) are sequentially transmitted (steps S3311 to S3317 in FIG. 32). Note that the gaming machine information serial number is updated at the time of this transmission (step S3318 in FIG. 32).

Hall con/fraud monitoring information corresponding to the gaming machine information type 2 includes game information corresponding to the number of inserted medals, the number of paid-out medals, and the number of game information. After being set in the buffer, it is initialized in preparation for the next transmission (determination of Yes in step S3307 in FIG. 32).

[Counting notification (periodic transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control section 350, a count notification is transmitted in the medal number control section main processing (step S305 in FIG. 27, FIG. 34). This count notification transmission process is configured to be executed after 90 ms from the start of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S3303 in FIG. 32, step S3501 in FIG. 34).

In the count notification transmission process, the data to be counted ((a) and (c) in FIG. 8) are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the lending machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3503 to S3505, S3513, and S3518 in FIG. 34). , S3519). Note that the counting serial number is updated during this transmission (step S3520 in FIG. 34).

This count notification includes information on the number of sheets to be counted. When the number of sheets to be counted is 0, 0 is transmitted as the number of sheets to be counted (determination of No in step S3508 in FIG. 34, step S3513). In this case, the number of game medals does not change (step S3514 in FIG. 34). On the other hand, when a value other than 0 is set as the number to be counted, the number to be counted is set based on this value (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 34), and the number of game medals is subtracted (FIG. 34). step S3514). It should be noted that the setting of the counted number and the subtraction of the number of game medals are executed in a state where the insertion operation is prohibited (steps S3509 and S3516 in FIG. 34). Note that the scheduled number of medals to be counted is set in the scheduled number of medals to be counted updating process of the timer interrupt process of the medal count control unit (step S405 in FIG. 37, FIG. 40).

[Setting the number of medals to be counted (medal number control section 350)]
In the medal number control section 350, the processing for updating the scheduled count number is executed in the medal number control section timer interrupt processing (step S405 in FIG. 37, FIG. 40). The number of sheets to be counted is determined based on the set number of sheets to be counted in this process, and a count notification including this information is transmitted to the lending machine 700 .

First, the case where the counting button 171 is pressed for less than 500 ms will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long-press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 40), but since the count button 171 is released before the value of the timer becomes 1 (500 ms has elapsed since the key was pressed), the count button 171 is released. The long press flag is not set to ON (Yes is not determined in step S4207 of FIG. 40). When the count button 171 is released in this state, 1 is added to the number of sheets to be counted (determination of Yes in step S4210 in FIG. 40, step S4212).

Next, the case where the count button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or longer will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long-press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 40), and when the value of the timer becomes 1 (500 ms has elapsed since the key was pressed), the count long-press flag is set to ON and counts. The planned number of sheets is set to 50 (Yes in step S4207 of FIG. 40). After that, while the count button 171 is kept pressed with the counting long-press flag turned on, the process of setting the scheduled number of sheets to be counted to 50 is repeated, and the number of sheets to be counted based on this scheduled number of sheets is counted each time the counting notification is sent. will be set. On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is released while the counting long-press flag is ON, the counting long-pressing flag is set to OFF, the counting long-pressing timer is set to 0, and the number of sheets to be counted is cleared (step S4210 in FIG. 40). determination of Yes, determination of No in step S4211).

[Rental notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]
Upon receiving the lending notification from the lending machine 700, the medal count control unit 350 updates the contents of the RAM based on the content of the lending notification (step S4003 in FIG. 38). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculated from the rental notification matches the checksum included in the rental notification (steps S4102 and S4103 in FIG. 39). Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation lending serial number of the medal count control unit 350 matches the lending serial number included in the lending notice (step S4104 in FIG. 39). The lending serial number for confirmation holds a value obtained by adding 1 to the lending serial number included in the previously received lending notification (step S3706 in FIG. 36), and is configured so that these values match when communication is normal. It is Furthermore, it is determined whether the message length and command data are normal. When an abnormality is determined by these determinations, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

Following the above determination, if the number of rented sheets included in the rent notification is 0, the determination result is set to "normal" (determination of Yes in step S4106 of FIG. 39). On the other hand, if the loaned number is not 0, the following determination is further executed (No determination in step S4106 in FIG. 39).

First, if the number of game medals is 15000 or more, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4107 of FIG. 39). In this embodiment, when the number of game medals is 15000 or more, it is configured so that it cannot be increased by lending. In this configuration, if the number of game medals exceeds 14,999, it cannot be increased by lending, and if it does not exceed 14,999 (if it is 14,999 or less), it will be an operation that can be increased by lending. In realizing this operation, for example, if the number is 15,000 or more, the increase due to lending is restricted, and if the number is 14,999 or less, the increase due to lending is allowed. will behave the same. Also, if the number is 14999 or less, it is possible to increase by lending. In other cases, even if the increase by lending is restricted, the operation is the same as in the present embodiment. As described above, in the actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold value (14999 in the above case), the increase due to lending cannot be performed. , Any value may be used as long as there is a value that becomes the actual threshold, and any processing may be used for the determination process and the determination value (15000 in this embodiment). For example, the actual threshold does not need to be the same as the determination value for processing do not have.

Further, the above determination may be made based on the number of game medals to be added instead of the current number of game medals. However, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which there is a real threshold value including the number of game medals to be added to the current number of game medals. In other words, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which, in the actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold value, the increase due to lending cannot be performed, and if the number of game medals does not exceed the actual threshold value, the increase due to lending can be performed.

Next, if the gaming machine information type is not 2, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4108 of FIG. 39). This embodiment is configured to accept lending when the gaming machine information type is set to 2. FIG.

Next, if the number of counted sheets is not 0, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4109 in FIG. 39). If the counted number is not 0, the number of game medals is subtracted, and if the loaned number is not 0, the number of game medals is added.

Finally, if the loaned number of sheets is greater than 50, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4110 of FIG. 39). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of sheets to be lent out per one time is set to 50.

If the above determination does not indicate an abnormality, the determination result is set to "normal" (determination of Yes in steps S4107 to S4110 in FIG. 39).

The determination result of the above processing is set to the loan number reception result, and the loan notice reception flag is set to ON (steps S4005 and S4006 in FIG. 38).

In addition to the lending notification reception process described above, the medal count control unit 350 executes lending notification reception confirmation processing in the medal count control unit main processing (step S306 in FIG. 27, FIG. 35). In this lending notification reception confirmation process, it is checked whether the lending notification reception flag is turned on for 170 ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process (step S3502 in FIG. 34, steps S3601 and S3602 in FIG. 35). . This lending notification reception flag is set in the lending notification reception processing of the timer interrupt processing of the medal count control section (step S404 in FIG. 37, FIG. 38).

Even though the VL signal is on, if the lending notification reception flag is not turned on within 170 ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process, the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1 ( Step S3604 in FIG. 35). The value of this lending machine communication error counter is initialized when the lending machine reception result response transmission is executed (step S3701 in FIG. 36), but an error occurs when the value of the lending machine communication error counter becomes 1 (see FIG. 52 steps S4D06, S4D07).

[Rental receipt result response (periodic transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal count control section 350, if the lending notice reception flag is set to ON after the lending notice reception confirmation processing, the lending receipt result response transmission processing is executed in the medal count control section main processing (step in FIG. 27). S308, FIG. 36).

In this lending reception result response transmission process, parameters related to lending machine communication abnormality are initialized (steps S3701 and S3702 in FIG. 36).

Subsequently, if the lending number receipt result is set to "normal", the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice is set to the normal lending serial number (step S3704 in FIG. 36). Also, after the value of the rental serial number included in the received rental notification is set as the rental serial number for confirmation, 1 is added to the value of the rental serial number for confirmation (steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 36). In other words, the value of the lending serial number for confirmation here is the same value as the value of the lending serial number scheduled to be included in the next lending notification.

Subsequently, the data ((a) and (e) in FIGS. 36A and 36B) to be used as the lending acceptance result response are set in the lending machine-addressed transmission buffer and sequentially transmitted (steps S3707 to S37011 in FIG. 36). With the above processing, if the loaned number receipt result is "normal", the currently received lending serial number is sent, and if the lending number receipt result is "abnormal", the previously received lending serial number is sent. . It should be noted that if the lending number reception result is "normal", the value of the lending number is added to the number of game medals after the completion of this transmission (determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 36).

[Operation for error (game control unit 302)]
The game control unit 302 determines various errors (step S203 in FIG. 23). For example, if a strobe signal is not detected for a certain period of time when a command is sent from the medal number control section 350, a medal number control disconnection error is set in the error status (FIG. 24). In the state where the error status is not set in the game control section 302 , the error status is set based on the error code of the medal number control section 350 . If the error status is set, a process of notifying that an error has occurred is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 16, step S1603 in FIG. 22). Therefore, an error on the side of the game control unit 302 is processed with priority over an error on the side of the medal number control unit 350. For example, if there is no error on the side of the game control unit 302, an error on the side of the medal number control unit 350 is notified. will be Also, the error status is transmitted to the medal count control section 350 by the error occurrence command (step S203 in FIG. 23).

[Operation in response to an error (medal count control unit 350)]
When the medal count control unit 350 determines that an error has occurred, an error code is set in the error request (step S3021 in FIG. 28, step S4414 in FIG. 42, step S4512 in FIG. 43, step S4706 in FIG. 46, step S4706 in FIG. 49, step S4A09 in FIG. 49, step S4D02 in FIG. 52, step S4D06 in FIG. 52, FIG. 30). Information of this error code is transmitted to the game control section 302 by means of a medal count control state command. In addition, when an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error request is cleared (step S4C01 in FIG. 51). Thus, an error on the game control section 302 side is processed with priority over an error on the medal count control section 350 side.

[Modified example for input operation]
FIG. 55 is a modification of the medal insertion process of FIG. 17, FIG. 56 is a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 20, and FIG. 57 is a modification of the insertion command reception process of FIG. be. The operation of these processes will be described below.

17, the requested number of coins is determined according to the operated bet buttons 130, 132 and the current bet number, and an insertion command including this information is transmitted to the medal count control section 350. (Fig. 20). On the other hand, in FIG. 55, when the MAX bet button (bet button 132) is operated, the input number limited flag is set to ON (step S1121 in FIG. 55), and the one bet button (bet button 130) is operated. If so, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF (step S1122 in FIG. 55). Then, an input command including the information of the input number limitation flag is transmitted to the medal number control section 350 (FIG. 56).

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 57, if the number of game medals exceeds the requested number, the requested number is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet number, the requested number is subtracted from the number of game medals, and the value of the requested number is It is returned to the game control unit 302 by a response command (determination of Yes at step S4604 in FIG. 57). Upon receiving this response command, the game control unit 302 adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 55).

In the inserting command reception process of FIG. 57, if the number of game medals equal to or larger than the required number is not found, the inserting number limitation flag is referred (determination of No in step S4604 of FIG. 57). When the number-of-throwing-in limited flag is ON, the processing for the requested number is not performed, and 0 is returned to the game control unit 302 as a response command (No in step S4621 in FIG. 57). In the game control section 302 which received this response command, the value returned by this response command, 0, is added to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 55), so the current bet number is maintained without change. It will be.

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 57, if there is no number of game medals equal to or greater than the required number and the insertion number limit flag is off, the operation is the same as when the current number of game medals is set to the required number (see FIG. 57). YES is determined in step S4621, and the number of game medals is set as the value of the received command in step S4622). That is, the value of the current number of game medals is added to the number of inserted medals and the current number of bets, and the number of game medals is subtracted to zero. Then, the value of the number of game medals before subtraction (the value set in the received command) is returned to the game control unit 302 by a response command. Upon receiving this response command, the game control unit 302 adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 55).

In the above modified example, when the number of game medals corresponding to the number requested by the insertion command is not sufficient, 0 is returned for the requested number of medals if the number-of-insertion limited flag is on, and if the number-of-insertion limitation flag is off. returns the maximum number of sheets currently available for the requested number of sheets. When the number-of-medals control unit 350 cannot respond to the requested number of medals from the game control unit 302, this configuration uses information (the number of inserted limited flag) is transmitted together with the requested number of sheets. With this configuration, for example, in a configuration where the advantage level changes depending on the difference in the current bet amount, it may be possible to prevent the current bet amount from becoming a disadvantageous value unintentionally.

In this embodiment, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated, a value necessary for setting the maximum bet number is set as the required number of bets. A configuration may be adopted in which some fixed value is set as the requested number of sheets.

Also, for example, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the maximum bet number is set as the requested number, if the bet number of one bet button 130 has been operated first and the current bet number is 1, the MAX bet button 132 is pressed. If an insertion command with the maximum bet number as the requested number is transmitted by an operation, the medal number control unit 350 cannot accept the requested number (the maximum bet number is exceeded). Also in this case, the number-of-medals control unit 350 cannot cope with the number of medals requested from the game control unit 302 . In such a case as well, by transmitting the information for proper use and the requested number of sheets together, the operation of not responding to the requested number of sheets (for example, returning 0 as a response command) and the operation of responding as much as possible ( For example, return the maximum number of bets as a response command) can be used properly.

《Example of operation》
An example of the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be described below.

[Operation example related to counting process]
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a first example in which the count button 171 is operated. FIG. 62(a) is a timing chart of the first example, and FIG. 62(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 62(a), time elapses from left to right. The same applies to the timing charts shown in subsequent figures.

At the top of the timing chart shown in FIG. 62(a), arrows are marked corresponding to (i) to (v) shown in FIG. 62(b). These arrows represent the display period of the game medal number display device 170 .

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 62(a), the timing at which the count notification is transmitted from the medal count control section 350 to the lending machine 700 is described as "counting timing". This counting timing has a period of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). The counted number (the number of game values transmitted to the lending machine 700) at this counting timing is shown. Further, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown below the "count number". Furthermore, the operation mode of the count button 171 is shown below it.

In the first example shown in FIG. 62, the operation of the counting button 171 is started in a state where the "number of game medals" is 250. As shown in (i) of FIG. 62(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "250".

Even if the first counting timing comes after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, the counting button 171 remains operated. Before long, 0.5 second (500 ms) has passed since the counting button 171 was started to be operated. Even when 0.5 seconds have passed, the count button 171 is still operated, and the long-press operation is performed, and 50 is set as the value of the number of sheets to be counted (step S4209 of update processing of the number of sheets to be counted shown in FIG. 40). ). In the following description, operation of the counting button 171 for 0.5 seconds or more is referred to as a long press, and operation of the counting button 171 for less than 0.5 seconds after starting operation is referred to as a short press. 40 is executed at a cycle of 0.7 ms, and while the counting button 171 continues to be operated for more than 0.5 seconds, the value of the scheduled count is updated at a cycle of 0.7 ms. It keeps being overwritten to the value of 50 sheets. After 0.5 seconds have passed since the operation of the counting button 171 was started, when the first counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is being operated, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted. (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 . The "number of game medals" is reduced from 50 to 200. As shown in (ii) of FIG. 62(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a changing display in which "1" is subtracted from the number "250". This change display is performed by displaying a number decremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms by the display processing shown in FIG. If the display on the game medal number display device 170 is suddenly changed from "250" to "200", the player may not notice the change in the display. A display (a display performed before displaying the number of game medals after the number of game medals is reduced by 50, and a display for recognizing that the number of game medals will change) is performed. Then, after about 200 ms has passed, the number "200" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (iii) of FIG. 62(b).

When the next counting timing arrives while the count button 171 is kept pressed, the number of counts is set again based on the value of the number of counts to be counted (50 in this example), and 50 is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. A sheet count notification is sent again. The "number of game medals" is reduced from 50 to 150. As shown in (iv) of FIG. 62(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which "1" is subtracted from the number "200" at intervals of about 4 ms. Then, when about 200 ms has passed, the number "150" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (v) of FIG. 62(b).

Furthermore, when the timing for counting the third time arrives while the count button 171 is kept pressed, the medal number control unit 350 sends a count notification of 50 medals to the lending machine 700, and the "number of game medals" is 50. Decrease to 100 sheets. After that, assume that the counting button 171 is released before the fourth counting timing arrives. That is, the long-pressing operation of the count button 171 ends. In this case, the value of the number of sheets to be counted (here, 50 sheets) is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. The value of "number of sheets" is 0. Therefore, the “number of game medals” remains at 100 as well. Since the change display is performed in a time (approximately 200 ms) shorter than the counting timing of 300 ms, the player, after visually recognizing the number after 50 tokens have been reduced, if he/she wants to keep that number of game medals. , the operation of the count button 171 is terminated, the number of game medals corresponding to the number can be left.

Also, when the counting button 171 is released before the first counting timing after the operation of the counting button 171 is started (when the hand is released at the timing of the arrow A shown in FIG. 62(a)), , one sheet is added to the value of the number of sheets to be counted (step S4212 shown in FIG. 40), and when the counting timing arrives, the one sheet is transmitted as a count notification. The “number of game medals” is reduced by one to 249, and the number “249” is displayed on the display device 170 for number of game medals.

Also, when the count button 171 is operated a plurality of times before the first count timing comes after the first operation of the count button 171 is started, that is, when the count button 171 is pressed a plurality of times before the count timing arrives. , the value of the number of sheets to be counted is incremented by one each time a short press is performed. Eventually, when the timing for counting arrives, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted (in this case, it corresponds to the number of times of single pressing), and the value of the number of times short-pressed until then is transmitted as a notification of counting.

On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is released after 0.5 seconds have passed since the operation of the counting button 171 was started and before the first counting timing has arrived (as indicated by the arrow B in FIG. 62(a)). If the hand is released at the timing), even if the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to 50, it will be cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. The value of "count" is 0 (a count notification indicating that the counted number of sheets is 0 is transmitted). Similarly, after the display of the number of game medals 170 changes from 250 to 200 in about 200 ms, when the count button 171 is released before the next count timing arrives (Fig. 62(a) ), the count notification of 50 sheets is not transmitted, and the "count" value becomes 0 (the count notification of 0 is transmitted). ).

FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing a first example of an effect during counting.

FIG. 63 shows the effect image display device 157 and the speaker 272 . As described above, the security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at a period of 100 ms contains information representing the number of coins to be counted.

When the count button 171 is pressed for a short time and one card is counted, no display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 to notify that counting is being performed. , its display continues. Also, the counting sound is not output from the speaker 272 . For example, if the effect sound corresponding to the game background display is being output, the output is continued. If the count sound is output with a small number, it may be mixed with other effects sounds, and may give the player an expectation different from the expectation that the other effects sounds were intended to express. In the first example, no counting sound is output. If the number of counting sounds is large, the output time is long, so there is little possibility that the sound will be mixed with other sound effects, and there will be little influence on other sound effects. It should be noted that even when two sheets are counted as a small number, the counting sound may not be output as in the case of one sheet.

On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is long pressed and 50 cards are counted, the effect image display device 157 displays a display notifying that counting is being performed, and the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound. . That is, as described above, the security command transmitted from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 at a period of 100 ms includes information representing the number of coins to be counted. In the first sub-control section 400, when information indicating 50 sheets is transmitted as the information indicating the number of sheets to be counted, a counting sound is output. In addition, when the second sub-controller 500 also receives the information representing 50 sheets as the information representing the counted number of sheets via the first sub-controller 400, it displays the in-counting notification.

Furthermore, the long press continues, and during the continuous counting in which 50 sheets are counted every 0.3 seconds, as shown in FIG. be done. This character display is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. In addition, the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound (for example, a notification sound "piyopiyo...") having a length of 0.3 seconds or longer. Since the length of the counting sound output at one time is 0.3 seconds or more, it is connected with the counting sound output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and it sounds like continuous output. For example, if the counting sound has a length of 0.5 seconds or more, it overlaps with the counting sound output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and the continuity is maintained, and the counting sound is generated in the continuous counting period. continue without interruption. It is recognized that continuous counting is being performed by the character display of "Continuous counting" and the continuous counting sound.

Note that when the number of sheets counted exceeds a predetermined number of 2 or more and less than 50 sheets (for example, 10 sheets), a counting sound may be output. In this case, a counting sound different from the counting sound during long pressing may be output. By doing so, for example, when the short press is repeated, it is possible to make the user recognize that a plurality of sheets have been counted. Alternatively, when the "number of game medals" stored in the medal number control unit 350 remains less than 50 (for example, 10 remaining) and the long press is performed, 10 are counted instead of 50. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that there are only a few left from the change in the effect sound.

FIG. 64 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation was performed before the count button 171 was operated and the bet number was not zero. In this embodiment, operating the count button 171 does not change the value of the current bet, but in FIG. 64, if the current bet is not 0 when the count button 171 is operated, counting processing is executed. This is a modified example in which settlement processing (setting the current number of bets to 0 and adding the decrement to the number of game medals) is performed before.

In the example shown in FIG. 64, when the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated and the counting button 171 is operated before the start lever 135 is operated, settlement (the number of bets is returned to the "number of game medals") is performed. will be

FIG. 64 shows the "current bet number", and below that, the value of the "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Furthermore, below that, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is shown, and at the bottom, the operation mode of the counting button 171 is shown.

In this example, the MAX bet button 132 is operated and the "current bet number" is 3. The "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 has been reduced from 68 to 65 by subtracting 3 in response to this betting operation. Before long, instead of operating the start lever 135, the counting button 171 is operated. When the counting button 171 is operated, the up edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 is detected, and based on this up edge detection, first, the number of bets is returned to the "number of game medals". . As a result, the "current number of bets" becomes 0, and the "number of game medals" increases by three to become 68. That is, the game returns to the state before the bet operation, and the previous bet operation is cancelled. After performing this cancellation, the counting process is performed. The counting button 171 is pressed long, and when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is kept pressed, 50 medals are counted, and the "number of game medals" decreases from 50 to 18 medals.

In this example, by operating the count button 171, the current bet number can be returned to the "number of game medals" without operating the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. I will end up doing it. In this configuration, if it is desired to change only the current number of bets, the adjustment button 134 should be operated. For example, after betting 3 coins, if you want to change to betting 1 coin, operate the checkout button 134 to temporarily return the 3 coins that have been bet to the "number of game medals", and then bet again for betting 1 coin. By operating the button 130, the current number of bets can be reduced to one. Note that the settlement button 134 may not be provided because the settlement process can be performed by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134 .

FIG. 65 is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end effect.

As described above, information indicating the counted number of coins included in the security command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 . The first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the counted number of sheets transmitted in the security command until the counted number of sheets transmitted reaches 0, and when it reaches 0 (when the counting is completed) Executes the counting end production with . The counting end effect here is an effect corresponding to the quantity of counting performed at once.

FIG. 65(a) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect that is performed when the accumulated number of sheets is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets). On the effect image display device 157, during counting, a counting effect (for example, character display of "Continuous counting" and output of counting sound described with reference to FIG. 63) is performed. , the effect image display device 157 performs a counting end effect 1 in which a character display of "counting end" is displayed.

On the other hand, FIG. 65(b) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect that is performed when the cumulative counted number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 1000). When the counting of a predetermined number or more is finished, the counting end effect 2 is performed, and the effect image display device 157 adds a warning display of ``be careful not to store too much'' in addition to the character display of ``counting finished''.

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store up to 16383 "game medal numbers". However, in the slot machine 100, there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" will disappear. Therefore, it is desired that the slot machine 100 does not continue to store too many "game medal counts". Therefore, it is preferable to issue a notification to increase the frequency of operation of the count button 171 . The warning display described with reference to FIG. 65(b) is an example of notification for increasing the operation frequency of the count button 171, and prompts the renting machine 700 to moderately transfer the game value. Note that the counting effect may also be changed according to the cumulative counted number of sheets. For example, when the cumulative counted number of sheets is less than a predetermined number (eg, 1000 sheets), a counting effect A is performed, and after the cumulative counted number of sheets reaches a predetermined number (eg, 1000 sheets) or more, the counting effect B is performed. shall be performed. Further, the counting performance A is a performance giving an impression that the player is in an appropriate state, and the counting performance B is a performance giving an impression that the player is in an inappropriate state. It is possible to give the player an unfavorable impression that the accumulated number of coins is large.

Here, the operation of the slot machine 100 when the settlement button 134 is operated will be described.

FIG. 66 is a timing chart showing an example when the settlement button 134 is operated.

In a conventional slot machine, real medals are lent, the real medals are inserted to secure credits, and the credits are used to set the number of bets. In such a conventional slot machine, not only the betted medals but also the stored medals are included in the settlement process of real medals (for example, the maximum number of bets is 3 and the maximum number of stored medals is 50). A total of 53 cards will be settled). When this settlement process ends, a demonstration command is output to the first sub-controller 400 , and the second sub-controller 500 may execute a process of displaying a demonstration screen on the effect image display device 157 . That is, there is a certain amount of time while the checkout process, which may involve the physical ejection of medals, is being performed. A settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect related to settlement based on this settlement button command. Move to a demonstration production based on the command.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, which does not require real medals, the object of settlement is the medals bet (current bet number, maximum 3), and physical medals are not ejected. The processing time related to settlement is a short amount of time. Therefore, after the payment button 134 is pressed, there is only a short processing time for payment, and the demo command is output to the first sub-controller 400 without delay. Therefore, if the specification is made to execute an effect based on the execution of the settlement process, this effect will be performed only for a short time before the demonstration effect, and there is a risk that the player will conversely feel uncomfortable. There is

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 66, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, an effect based on this settlement button command is output. (output of settlement tone, etc.) is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 66, when the bet operation is performed and the "current number of bets" is 3, the settlement button 134 is operated to perform the settlement operation. By this settlement operation, the number of bets (three) is added to the "number of game medals", which increases from 65 to 68.

FIG. 66 shows the speaker 272 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. Even if the settlement operation is performed, the settlement sound is not output from the speaker 272 . Further, the game background display is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the settlement display is not displayed. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 66, the display is immediately switched to the demonstration display. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the demonstration effect based on receiving the checkout button command (or the demonstration command immediately after the checkout button command). In this example, only the demonstration effect is executed at the start of the demonstration, making the start of the demonstration clearer.

It should be noted that the specification may be such that the settlement effect is executed (for example, it is executed for 2 seconds). While the settlement performance is being executed, even if the demonstration performance is started, the settlement performance is continued so that both performances are executed together. Although it is expected that the frequency of settlement operations will be lower than in conventional slot machines, there is a possibility that settlement operations will be performed due to fraudulent acts (so-called cheating), so there are settlement processes around. make it known.

Next, an example in which the number of sheets to be counted changes according to the length of operation time of the count button 171 will be described.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the count button 171 increases. Note that, in this example, instead of the planned count number update process shown in FIG. 40, the planned count number update process shown in FIG. 58 is adopted.

FIG. 67(a) is a table showing specific values of the count long-press timer set in step S4221 in the flowchart of the scheduled number count update process shown in FIG. In this table, the count long-press timer value is set for each long-press step value. That is, when the long-press step value increases from 1 to 4, the value of the counting long-press timer decreases by a predetermined time (here, 300 ms). That is, the value of the count long-press timer is shortened step by step. Then, when the value of the long-press step value is 4 or more, the value of the counting long-press timer becomes a constant value (here, 300 ms).

FIG. 67(b) is a table showing specific values of the planned number of sheets used in step S4222 in the flowchart of the planned number of sheets update process shown in FIG. In this table, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set for each long press step value. In other words, when the long-press step value increases from 1 to 4, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted increases as the long-press step value increases. As a result, the number of sheets to be counted increases step by step according to the operation time of the counting button 171 . Note that even if the same value is set a plurality of times, the number of sheets to be counted will eventually increase step by step. For example, even if the values of the number of sheets to be counted are set as 10→10→20→20→20→30→30→30→30 . Then, when the value of the long press step value is 4 or more, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted becomes a constant value (here, 50 sheets).

FIG. 67(c) is a timing chart when counting is performed using the count long-press timer shown in FIG. 67(a) and the number of sheets to be counted shown in FIG. 67(b).

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 67(c), the timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the medal count control section 350 to the lending machine 700 is described as "counting timing". This counting timing has a period of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). On the other hand, at the top of the timing chart is shown a timing chart showing the ON state when the count button 171 is being operated.

When the count button 171 changes from OFF to ON, a count long-press timer (value for 1.2 seconds) with a long-press step value of 1 is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), and the timer is turned on. When the count button 171 is kept pressed until the value becomes "1", 10 sheets are set as the expected number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). When the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long-press timer (a value for 0.9 seconds) with a long-press step value of 2 is set (step shown in FIG. 58). S4221). If the counting button 171 is kept pressed until 0.9 seconds set in the count long-press timer elapses, 10 sheets set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted will be counted at a timing of 0.9 seconds. It will be counted each time it arrives every 3 seconds.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set as the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Subsequently, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long-press timer (value for 0.6 seconds) with a long-press step value of 3 is set (shown in FIG. 58). step S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until 0.6 seconds set in the count long-press timer elapses, 20 sheets set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted will be counted at the timing of 0.6 seconds. It will be counted each time it arrives every 3 seconds.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets are set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Furthermore, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long-press timer (value for 0.3 seconds) with a long-press step value of 4 is set (step shown in FIG. 58). S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until 0.3 seconds set in the count long-press timer elapses, the timing of counting 30 sheets, which is set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, arrives. will be counted by

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets are set as the expected number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Thereafter, the count long-press timer is repeatedly set to a value of 0.3 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), and 50 sheets are repeatedly set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). As a result, if the count button 171 is kept pressed, 50 sheets are counted every time the count timing comes.

In the example described here, as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer, the value of the counting long-press timer becomes shorter and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases. As the time becomes longer, the value of the long-press timer for counting may become longer, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may increase. Alternatively, the value of the count long-press timer may be shortened, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may be decreased.

In addition, until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0, the value set in the counting long-press timer is gradually shortened, and the value of the expected number of medals to be counted is gradually increased. You can

FIG. 68(a) is a timing chart showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 67(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 67(c), after the long-press step value reaches 4, the count long-press timer value is constant at the shortest 0.3 seconds, and the maximum number of sheets to be counted is constant at 50. become. This state may be continued until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0, but when the number of game medals falls below a certain value (for example, 300), endgame processing is executed. You may make it The term "final stage processing" as used herein refers to a process of increasing the value of the count long-press timer and decreasing the value of the number of tokens to be counted as the number of game medals decreases.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 68(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed. At the left end of this timing chart, the value of the count long-press timer is set to a value of 0.3 seconds, and the number of expected counts is set to 50, and the "number of game medals" is 299. "Number of game medals" is below a certain value (300).

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets are set again as the expected number of sheets to be counted (step SS4222 shown in FIG. 58). Note that the number of sheets set at this timing may be less than 50 sheets (for example, 30 sheets). Further, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long-press timer is set to the value for 0.6 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), and becomes longer.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets is set as the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Further, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long-press timer is set to the value for 0.9 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58) and becomes longer again.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets are set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Further, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long-press timer is set to the value for 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), and becomes longer.

Then, when the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets are set again as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). In addition, the number of sheets less than 20 sheets (for example, 10 sheets) may be set as the number of sheets to be counted. Further, when the value of the timer becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long-press timer is set again to the value for 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58). Note that a value exceeding the value for 1.2 seconds (for example, the value for 1.5 seconds) may be set as the value of the counting long press timer. In the example shown in FIG. 68(a), after the "number of game medals" reaches nine, the count button 171 is released and the count button 171 is turned off. As a result, counting ends when the "number of game medals" reaches nine.

In the final stage processing described above, the number of sheets to be counted decreases step by step, and the value of the count long-press timer increases. It is possible to reduce the number of "game medals" becoming 0. If it is desired to set the "number of game medals" to 0, the counting button 171 should be operated until the display of the number of game medals display device 170 becomes "0".

FIG. 68(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case in which power is restored after a power failure occurs while the number of sheets to be counted is set to 30 in the example shown in FIG. 67(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 68(b), the count button 171 remains in operation even after the power is cut off until the power is restored. For example, when there is an instantaneous power failure, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, there are players who do not let go of the counting button 171 even after knowing that the power has been cut off. However, this is only in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 is kept being operated after the power failure occurs until the power is restored. I don't know if it stayed. If power is restored while the counting button 171 is being operated, the ON signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. In this case, if the ON signal is detected even after 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, the medal number control unit 350 determines the maximum number of medals to be counted (50 in this example). ) is set (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Even if control is once interrupted due to a power failure, continued operation of the counting button 171 for a long period of time can be reflected after the power is restored.

Note that after the power is restored, the number of sheets (for example, 30 sheets) that is slightly smaller than the maximum number of sheets may be set. Alternatively, the planned number of sheets to be counted at the time of power failure may be reset.

Also, although the description here is about the number of sheets to be counted, the same applies to the value of the long-press counting timer. That is, when power is restored while the count button 171 is being operated, the medal count control section 350 sets the value for the shortest time (in this example, the value for 300 ms) as the value of the count long-press timer. (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58).

FIG. 69 is a timing chart showing an example in which the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 59 is employed.

The operation of the counting button 171 is started at the timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long-pressing operation, and 50 sheets are counted. Furthermore, when 1.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (cumulative 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C), automatic counting is performed even if the counting button 171 is released, and 0.3 seconds is counted. Each time the timing comes, 50 cards are counted. This automatic counting continues until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes zero. Therefore, the number of game medals can be quickly set to 0 by an operation that does not take time and effort.

It should be noted that when the automatic counting is started, the change display on the game medal number display device 170 explained with reference to FIG. go. In the 7-segment display, which is the game medal number display device 170, the change display in which 1 is decremented at intervals of about 4 ms is such that all 7 segments are lit and some segments are slightly blinking due to afterimages. It may look like Moreover, if the changing display is continued until the number of game medals in the "number of game medals" becomes 0, the current display number may rather become difficult to understand. Players who select automatic counting often want to set the number of game medals in the "number of game medals" to 0, and there may be little need to change the display to show that the number of game medals is being decremented by one. be.

In addition, since the player does not operate during the period when the automatic counting is performed, it is preferable to inform the player that the automatic counting is being performed by means of a lamp or the like. Also, if there is a payout based on the game result during the automatic counting, the payout amount is also included in the automatic counting. That is, the number of medals paid out during automatic counting is added to the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, and is included in the target from the next counting.

FIG. 70(a) is a timing chart showing an example in which the automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value.

When the counting button 171 is operated for 2.0 seconds, automatic counting is started, and 50 sheets are counted each time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives. In FIG. 70(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is also shown below the "count number". In this example, the counting button 171 is released when the "number of game medals" reaches 147, but the "number of game medals" continues to decrease due to automatic counting. Eventually, when the "number of game medals" becomes less than a certain value (for example, the value counted at one counting timing, here 50 medals), the automatic counting automatically ends, and the count button 171 must be operated. , the "number of game medals" will not decrease. Here, the remaining 47 sheets remain without being automatically counted. When it is desired to continue the game after the automatic counting, the game can be started quickly because there is a remaining number. There is also a case where it is desired to count all the number of game medals. To start counting again, the counting button 171 is operated again. For example, if a long press operation is performed for 0.5 seconds, the "number of game medals" becomes 0. It should be noted that the certain value is set to 50, but the player may be allowed to set a certain value. For example, the player may be allowed to select 0, 20, or 50 sheets. A desired number of game medals can be left after counting. A certain value may be set according to the game state. For example, a certain value is set to 0 in a normal game state, and a certain value is set to 50 in a privilege game state such as during an AT game. Since the possibility of ending the game is low in the privilege game state, the game can be started quickly by leaving a certain number of game medals. A certain value may be set according to the automatically counted number of game medals. For example, when less than 100 game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 0, and when 100 or more game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 20. If a small number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to exchange the counted number of game medals for a prize such as a drink, and there is a possibility that the game will be continued after automatic counting. A game can be quickly started by leaving a certain number of game medals. Also, the opposite is possible. When a large number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to temporarily count them by executing a notification or the like to prompt counting, and there is a possibility that the game will be continued after automatic counting. A game can be quickly started by leaving a certain number of game medals.

FIG. 70(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is restored during automatic counting.

In the example shown in FIG. 70(b), automatic counting is started and the counting button 171 is released. A power failure occurs in a state in which 50 medals are being counted each time a counting timing of 0.3 seconds is reached by automatic counting. After that, the power is restored, but if the counting button 171 is operated again at the timing of the power restoration, or if the counting button 171 is operated while the power is off and the power is restored while being operated. , after the power is restored, an ON signal indicating the ON state of the count button 171 is detected. When this ON signal is detected when power is restored, automatic counting is started even if two seconds, which is the determination time for starting automatic counting, has not passed. That is, 50 sheets are counted when the first counting timing comes after the power is restored. Therefore, automatic counting is started even if the counting button 171 is released before two seconds have elapsed since the power was restored.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a display example indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

FIG. 71 shows an effect image display device 157, which is a liquid crystal display, and a game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display.

The upper part of FIG. 71 shows the state during counting before automatic counting is started. In other words, the number of sheets to be counted is determined by the operation mode of the count button 171 (long press or one or more short presses). In this state, the characters "counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is being displayed. That is, the character display of "counting" is displayed so as to overlap the game background display.

Also, in the game medal number display device 170 shown on the upper side, the segment representing 97 is lit.

On the other hand, the lower part of FIG. 71 shows a state in which automatic counting is being performed. When the automatic counting is started, the medal number control section 350 sends a command to the game control section 302 including the automatic counting information indicating that the counting is performed by automatic counting in the counting number information of the medal number control state command. The game control section 302 transmits the security command to the first sub-control section 400, including the information indicating the number of sheets to be counted and the above automatic counting information in the security command. The second sub-controller 500 receives the automatic counting information via the first sub-controller 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the characters "automatically counting" and the message 157m. In the state in which automatic counting is being performed, automatic counting state notification is provided. It should be noted that while the automatic counting is being performed, a notification may be given by sound or a lamp. In FIG. 71, the effect image display device 157 displaying the game background displays the character display of "automatically counting". Below that, there is an explanation about how to handle the counting button 171 during automatic counting, such as "Even if you release the button, the counting continues." In the state in which automatic counting state notification is being performed, button operation unnecessary notification is performed. Furthermore, there is also an explanation such as "You can play games." In the state where the automatic counting state notification is being performed, the game progress possible notification is performed. It is notified that the game can be progressed by operating the start lever 135 and operating the stop buttons 130 to 132 even during automatic counting. Note that operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 are not accepted during the counting process. In addition, since it is anticipated that there will be a case where it is desired to manually end the automatic counting after the automatic counting has started, the automatic counting should be ended by operating the counting button 171 again after the automatic counting has started. good too. That is, when the medal count control unit 350 detects the rising edge of the signal indicating the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 during automatic counting, it ends the automatic counting. When the automatic counting ends, the notification of the automatic counting state ends.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

The operation of the counting button 171 is started at the timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long-pressing operation, and 50 sheets are counted. Further, when 1.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (cumulative 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C), automatic counting is performed even if the counting button 171 is released. In this example, when 2.0 seconds have passed and the first counting timing has arrived, the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound indicating that automatic counting has started. Note that the counting sound may be output after 2.0 seconds have passed.

The volume of the counting sound increases at predetermined time intervals. Although the predetermined time here is 1.2 seconds, it may be 3 seconds or 0.3 seconds. By increasing the sound volume as time elapses, it is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count amount is increasing. The first counting sound that is output first and the second counting sound that is output next are continuously output, the second counting sound and the third counting sound that is output next are also continuously output, and the third counting sound is The sound and the next output fourth counting sound are also output continuously. In addition to the volume, the rhythm, pitch, timbre, etc. may be changed. That is, it is sufficient that the counting sound changes stepwise. For example, the (n+1)th counting sound may be a counting sound with a faster rhythm than the nth counting sound, or may be a counting sound with a higher pitch. Alternatively, only the tone color may change at predetermined time intervals without increasing the volume at predetermined time intervals. For example, the first counting sound is a sound consisting only of instrumental sound A, the second counting sound is a sound consisting of instrumental sound A plus instrumental sound B, and the third counting sound is a sound consisting of instrumental sound A and instrumental sound A. A sound composed of a plurality of sounds obtained by adding a musical instrument sound B to a musical instrument sound C is assumed. It is possible to make the user easily recognize that the cumulative count amount is increasing.

On the other hand, if the counting sound continues to be output during counting, the player may feel uncomfortable. For example, it takes about 50 seconds to count 5,000 cards obtained through a game at once. If the counting sound continues to be output during this period, it may feel offensive and may be disliked by the adjacent players. As countermeasures for these cases, the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time elapses, or the counting sound may be output for a predetermined period of time and then silenced (volume 0). Alternatively, the volume of the counting sound may decrease as time elapses, and the constant sound (volume 1) may be set after the counting sound is output for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, in the case of a slot machine equipped with a function that allows the player to perform various customizations, the type and volume of the counting sound, the method of change (for example, whether to increase or decrease the volume, etc.), etc. The player may be allowed to make a selection. By doing so, it is also possible to increase interest in counting.

In addition to the sound, a lamp may emit light, an image may be output, and the light emission mode of the lamp and the image may be changed step by step.

FIG. 73 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power failure occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, has elapsed after the operation of the count button 171 was started.

In the example shown in FIG. 73(a), the operation of the count button 171 is started, and power is cut off before the count long-press flag described with reference to FIG. 40 (or FIGS. 58 and 59) is set to ON. The counting button 171 remains operated until the power is restored. For example, when there is an instantaneous power failure, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, there are players who do not let go of the counting button 171 even after knowing that the power has been cut off. However, this is only in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 is kept being operated after the power failure occurs until the power is restored. I don't know if it stayed. If power is restored while the counting button 171 is being operated, the ON signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. When the ON signal is detected without detecting the up edge after the power is restored, the medal count control section 350 determines that the counting button 171 has been continuously operated, and 0.5 seconds has passed since the power was restored. It is determined whether or not the counting button 171 remains operated until the time elapses. Here, if the count button 171 continues to be operated, the count long-press flag is set to ON. counted.

If the long press is performed after the power is restored, the long press may be notified. The long-press informing is started from the time when the long-press is continued when the first counting timing comes after 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored. This means that if the count button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have passed, the long press is not performed, and the count is made before the first count timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed. When the button 171 is released, none of the cards are counted. Pressing notification is started.

Note that if the count button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored, one sheet is counted, but it may be an erroneous operation. Therefore, if the operation of the count button 171 is completed within 0.5 seconds immediately after the power is turned on, it may be treated as an erroneous operation and not counted.

FIG. 73(b) shows an example in which the start of operation of the count button 171 is determined by detecting only the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the count button 171. FIG.

According to the example shown in FIG. 73(b), since the count button 171 is still being operated during the power failure, the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the count button 171 is not detected after the power is restored. No matter how long the counting button 171 is operated, the long-press determination is not performed, and counting is not performed. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 73(a), since the long-press determination is performed depending on whether or not 0.5 seconds have passed since the ON signal of the counting button 171 was detected, even if the rising edge is not detected, Long press judgment is executed.

74 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 73. FIG.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 74(a), the power is cut off when X seconds, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, has elapsed after the operation of the count button 171 was started. , then power is restored.

After the power is restored, if the ON signal is detected without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171, a long press operation is performed for X seconds that have elapsed before the power failure. If the counting button 171 is operated for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds), the counting button 171 is operated for 0.5 seconds. The count long-press flag is set to ON, assuming that the count has been held.

In the modification shown in FIG. 74(b) as well, after the start of operation of the count button 171, power failure occurs when X seconds, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-press operation, has elapsed. Power is restored.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 74(b), standby processing is provided for a certain period of time (standby time of 2 seconds in this example) when power is restored (when power is turned on). That is, since the processing load increases immediately after the power is turned on, the processing related to the counting button 171 is performed after waiting until the appropriate timing for performing the counting processing. After the standby time has passed, the processing related to the counting button 171 is performed as in FIG. 74(a). That is, when the ON signal is detected without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the count button 171, the long-pressing operation is determined for X seconds that have elapsed before the power failure. If the operation of the counting button 171 is continued for the remaining time ((0.5−X) seconds) after the waiting time has elapsed, the counting button is held for 0.5 seconds. Assuming that 171 has been operated, the count long-press flag is set to ON.

FIG. 75 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG.

In the third modification shown in FIG. 75( a ), after starting the operation of the counting button 171 , the power is cut off before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time of the long-pressing operation, has passed, and then the power is restored. .

After the power is restored (power is turned on), the medal number control unit 350 detects the ON signal without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171. If the ON signal is detected, the counting button 171 is operated. It determines that the power supply has been continuously set, and starts a timer dedicated to power-on. This timer measures a longer time (for example, 2 seconds) than the normal long-pressing operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Specifically, 2000 ms is set as an initial value exclusively for when the power is turned on to the counting long press timer whose initial value is set to 500 ms in step S4206 in FIG. In this way, when the long press operation is performed immediately after turning on the power, the count long press flag is set to ON when the long operation is performed. pieces are counted.

In the fourth modification shown in FIG. 75(b), after the operation of the count button 171 is started, the power is cut off before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, has passed, and then the power is restored. . In this example, the operation ends when the counting button 171 is released while the power is off. Therefore, when power is restored (power is turned on), the ON signal indicating the ON state of the counting button 171 is not detected. Then, in this fourth modification, a timer dedicated to power-on is activated in accordance with power-on. This timer counts a longer time (for example, 3 seconds) than the normal long-pressing operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Also, the timer set value dedicated to power-on in this example is longer than the timer set value dedicated to power-on in the third modification (for example, 2 seconds). If the operation of the count button 171 is started while the timer dedicated to power-on is counting time, and the operation of the count button 171 continues even after 3 seconds have passed, the count long-press flag is set to ON. be. That is, while the timer is counting time, at least one of the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 and the ON signal is detected, and the ON signal is still detected after 3 seconds have passed. If so, the count long-press flag is set to ON. Then, when the count timing arrives while the count button 171 is continuously operated, 50 sheets are counted.

Next, the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display, explained with reference to FIG. 62(b) will be explained in detail again.

FIG. 76(a) is a diagram showing an example of change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170. FIG.

As shown at the top of FIG. 76(a), the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "100". When the change display is started, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number decremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms in the display device display process shown in FIG. FIG. 76(a) shows a state in which "1" is subtracted from "99"→"98"→"97"→"96"→"95"→"94".

When 50 sheets are counted by long-pressing the count button 171, the time required for the change display is approximately 4 ms×50=approximately 200 ms in order to display the change by “1” at intervals of approximately 4 ms. Since the count timing is a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display to be subtracted is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is possible to perform the change display to subtract 50 images.

FIG. 76(b) is a diagram showing an example of change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170. As shown in FIG.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown at the top of FIG. 76(b). When the change display is started, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number incremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms as in the change display at the time of subtraction. FIG. 76(b) shows a state in which "1" is added step by step as "101"→"102"→"103"→"104"→"105"→"106".

When 50 coins are lent out by operating the lending button 707 and 15 coins (corresponding to the maximum number of payouts allowed under the rules) are paid out as a result of the game, "1" is displayed at intervals of about 4 ms. In order to perform the change display (addition and subtraction) step by step, the time required for the change display is approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms. Since the count timing is a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display to be added is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is possible to perform the change display to add 65 images.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing another example of change display on the game medal number display device 170. As shown in FIG. Since the player may not notice the change in the display content of the game medal number display device 170, this is an example of notifying that the display content has changed.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 77(a). In the example here, all the digits are used to display the change, making it easy to recognize that the change is in progress. When changing from the number "100" to the number "85", in the middle of the display, all segments of all five digits are illuminated (display of "88888") and all segments of all five digits are extinguished. The display (display of "00000") is switched and displayed every 8 ms in this example. Eventually, in this example, when 250 ms have passed, the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "85". Since all the digits are used for the change display, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a failure in which the segments of all the digits of the game medal number display device 170 do not display. If it can be recognized that no failure has occurred, it can be recognized that there is no error in the numbers displayed after the change display.

Although all the digits are used in the change display here, only a part of the digits may be used in order to reduce the processing load and the data volume. For example, one-digit display including the rightmost one-digit, two-digit display, or three-digit display is performed. Not including the rightmost digit when not using all digits may give the impression that the rightmost digit is broken, so it is meant to indicate that there is no failure. Include the rightmost single digit.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 77(b). Also in this example, the number "100" changes to the number "85". That is, it changes from a three-digit number to a two-digit number. Therefore, a change display using three-digit segments is performed. The change display here changes the position of the lit segment for each digit, and the segments appear to go around. According to this changing display, it is possible to give an impression that the number changes starting from "100". Then, in this example, when 250 ms have passed since the start of the change display, the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "85".

If a change display is performed using two-digit segments instead of three-digit segments, it is possible to give the impression that the number changes with "85" as the end point.

As described above, while interposing the two types of change display described with reference to FIG. 77, a display that changes step by step by a predetermined number (for example, 20) toward the target value may be performed. Specifically, when the value of "100" finally changes to "60" (target value), "100" → display of change → "80" → display of change → display of "60" Become. Furthermore, when a full-color 7-segment LED display device is used as the game medal number display device 170, the light emission color of the segment may be changed when the segment is lit during the change display.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of displaying the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 by the effect image display device 157 in addition to the game medal number display device 170. As shown in FIG.

The number-of-games medal control unit 350 transmits a command including information representing the number of game medals (the number of displayed number of game medals shown in FIG. 11) to the game control unit 302 as a number-of-games medal control state command. The game control unit 302 transmits the security command to the first sub-control unit 400, including information indicating the number of game medals in the security command. Security commands are sent to the first sub-controller 400 at intervals of 100ms. The second sub-control unit 500 receives information representing the “number of game medals” via the first sub-control unit 400 and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the “number of game medals”. In this example, the “number of game medals” is always displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the effect image display device 157 .

In this example, the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 displays the number as it is according to the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command transmitted at intervals of 100 ms. . The effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 78 displays the number "100" according to the previous security command. In addition, the number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 displayed on the far left. In this state, the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time, and 50 sheets are counted. The medal number control unit 350 starts executing the display device display process shown in FIG. 54, and the game medal number display device 170 starts a change display that subtracts "1" at intervals of about 4 ms. In FIG. 78, the display during the change display is shown in such a manner that seven segments are all lit up and some segments are slightly blinking due to an afterimage. On the game medal number display device 170, a changing display is performed by subtracting "1" for about 200 ms, and the number "50" is displayed about 200 ms after 50 medals are counted.

On the other hand, on the first sub-control unit 400 side, when 50 medals are counted, a security command containing information indicating that the "number of game medals" is 50 is issued during the security command transmission period (100 ms). Receive commands. In the example shown in FIG. 78, the security command is received by the first sub-controller 400 after about 20 ms have passed since 50 sheets have been counted, and display processing is executed. The display processing here is frame replacement processing for replacing an image displaying "100" with an image displaying "50", and is completed in a short time. As a result, the effect image display device 157 will display the number “50” before the change display on the game medal number display device 170 is completed.

In the example shown in FIG. 78 described above, the sub-control section (400, 500) receiving the information on the "number of game medals" does not change the display, and the main control section 300 that outputs the information does not display the change. Change display. By doing this, the numerical value “50” finally displayed by the game medal number display device 170 can be grasped from the display on the effect image display device 157, and “50” is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. It can be recognized that the change display has been completed at the time point.

79 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 78. FIG.

In the modification shown in FIG. 79, even the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 is changed by subtracting "1". Moreover, the changing display takes longer than the changing display in the game medal number display device 170.例文帳に追加Specifically, the change display on the effect image display device 157 is performed in 280 ms. This time of 280 ms indicates that 50 tokens are lent out by operating the lending button 707, and 15 tokens (equivalent to the maximum number of tokens to be paid out) are paid out as a result of the game. This time is longer than the time (approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms) required for addition change display and less than 300 ms, which is the period of counting timing.

A player usually looks at the effect image display device 157 in many cases, and does not often look at the game medal number display device 170 . As described above, it is desired that the slot machine 100 does not continue to store too many "game medal counts", and that the counting button 171 is operated more frequently. For that purpose, it is necessary to make the player pay attention to the "number of game medals". The reason why the effect image display device 157 also displays the "number of game medals" is to make the player pay attention to the "number of game medals" as much as possible. However, since the effect image display device 157 displays an attractive effect display such as a game background display, even if the "number of game medals" is displayed, the player is distracted by the attractive effect display. tend to Therefore, as in this modification, if the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 takes longer than the display of the number of game medals on the game medal display device 170, the player will be able to It can be expected that the player will pay attention to the game medal number display device 170 as well. If the game medal number display device 170 is seen, the effect display is not displayed on the game medal number display device 170, so that the player can clearly recognize the "game medal number". As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals has been accumulated, and it can be expected that the counting button 171 will be operated more frequently.

In addition, in the change display in the effect image display device 157, by displaying not only the changing character display but also the animation display indicating that the change is in progress, attention is likely to be drawn to the "number of game medals", and the number is counted here as well. It can be expected that the button 171 will be operated more frequently. By making the change display by the effect image display device 157 different from the change display by the game medal number display device 170, the change display can be made suitable for the period of the change display. Note that the change display by the effect image display device 157 may be displayed in the same mode as the change display by the game medal number display device 170 . It is easy to recognize that the change display is being performed.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing another example that is completely different from the example shown in FIG.

In another example shown in FIG. 80, the number-of-game-medals display device 170 does not perform a change display, and only the display of the "number of game medals" in the effect image display device 157 performs a change-display. That is, in this example, the display device display process shown in FIG. 54 is not executed, and when 50 medals are counted, the game medal number display device 170 immediately displays the number "50". On the other hand, even if the security command is received, the effect image display device 157 does not immediately perform display according to the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command, but subtracts "1" at a time. A changing display is performed.

In this example as well, similarly to the modified example shown in FIG. 79, it takes more time to display the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 than on the display device 170 of the number of game medals. It can be expected that the game medal number display device 170, which is displayed quickly, will also be taken into consideration. By having the player look at the game medal number display device 170, the player can clearly recognize the "game medal number". As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals has been accumulated, and it can be expected that the counting button 171 will be operated more frequently. In addition, in the medal number control section 350, the amount of data for display of changes is reduced, and the processing load is reduced.

FIG. 81(a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed in excess of the payout threshold.

In FIG. 81(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Below that, the number of payouts to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

The RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 can store up to 16383 “game medal counts”. That is, the maximum number of sheets that can be stored in the RAM 358 is 16,383. The payout threshold is set to this maximum number of stored coins.

In a state in which the "number of game medals" is stored up to 16373, 15 coins corresponding to the maximum number of payouts (corresponding to the maximum number of payouts allowed under the regulations) are paid out. The payout number of 15 is included in the game control state command 1 (payout command) and transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350 . When the number of payouts of 15 is added, the "number of game medals" exceeds the maximum number of stored medals and exceeds the threshold value for payout in step S4B03 of FIG. Therefore, the payout response command includes “abnormality” and is transmitted from the medal count control section 350 to the game control section 302 . If the payout response command includes "abnormal", the game control unit 302 transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout). (Step S1608 shown in FIG. 22). On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), based on this command, an upper limit exceeded error notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 81(a), on the effect image display device 157 where the game background display is displayed, as the upper limit exceeded error notification, the payout threshold is exceeded and the counting is performed so as to overlap the game background display. A character display prompting the operation of the button 171 is displayed. That is, even during the game, the upper limit exceeded error notification is executed.

As the upper limit exceeded error notification, an error sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be lit.

FIG. 81(b) is a diagram showing another example of an upper limit exceeding error notification.

Blinking display on the effect image display device 157 may be performed as the upper limit exceeded error notification. In the example shown in FIG. 81(b), the character display of the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed so as to overlap the game background display every second. Since the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed during the game so as to overlap the game background display, the game background display becomes difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid any disadvantage to the player, blinking display is performed to secure a period in which the game background display can be easily seen.

When the game control unit 302 receives a payout response command including “normal” from the medal count control unit 350, it transmits a payout command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 shown in FIG. 22). On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), when the payout command is received while the upper limit exceeded error notification is being executed, execution of the upper limit exceeded error notification is terminated. Incidentally, if there is an operation to the count button 171, regardless of the number of game medals, the upper limit exceeded error notification may be terminated. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit exceeding error notification can be terminated early.

In addition, information representing the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is included in the security command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 . When the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" is the number of payout threshold values (16383 medals), the secondary control unit (400, 500) may perform upper limit reaching error notification. good. For example, the effect image display device 157 may display a character display that reads, "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the count button." This upper limit reaching error notification ends when the transmitted information indicating the number of game medals is less than the payout threshold value (16383 medals). Incidentally, if there is an operation to the counting button 171, the upper limit reaching error notification may be ended regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit reaching error notification can be terminated early.

Other cases in which the "number of game medals" is added are the case of settlement and the case of lending from the lending machine 700. FIG. In the present embodiment, reaching the upper limit is not determined for settlement, but reaching the upper limit may be determined as in the case of payout. For example, even if the settlement threshold is set to the maximum number of stored sheets and the settlement exceeds the settlement threshold, the settlement response command includes "abnormality", and the medal number control unit 350 sends the game control unit 302 to be sent. Then, the game control unit 302 also transmits an error generation command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that an error of exceeding the upper limit of the number of displayed game medals has occurred, even when "abnormality" is included in the settlement response command. On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), an upper limit exceeding error is reported. On the other hand, the lending threshold is set to a smaller number (for example, 15,000) than the maximum number of stored tokens. , lending is not accepted (if the determination in step S3712 in FIG. 36 is No), and the "number of game medals" is not added. A notice of an error in lending exceeding the upper limit is displayed on the information display 703 of the lending machine 700 . However, the effect image display device 157 is transmitted by transmitting the occurrence of the upper limit lending error from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302 and further from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400. , a speaker 272, a lamp, or the like on the slot machine 100 side.

FIG. 82(a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed in excess of the second payout threshold.

Also in FIG. 82(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown, and the number of payouts to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown below.

A command including the display number of game medals (the number of game medals) is transmitted to the game control unit 302 from the medal number control unit 350 as a medal number control state command. The game control unit 302 is set with a second payout threshold (for example, 15000) that is less than the maximum number of coins stored in the RAM 358 of 16383 (payout threshold). In the game control section 302, when the number of displayed game medals sent as a command is equal to or greater than the second threshold value for payout, an error nearing the upper limit of displayed number of game medals occurs in the first sub-control section 400. Send an error generation command indicating that On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), based on this error occurrence command, the upper limit approaching notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 82(a), the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed has a character display prompting the operation of the count button 171 as an upper limit imminent notification so as to overlap the game background display. is displayed. That is, in this example as well, the approaching upper limit notification is executed during the game. FIG. 81(a) shows the effect image display device 157 in which the display of the upper limit imminent notification is switched to the display of the upper limit exceeded error notification.

In addition, as an upper limit imminent notification, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be turned on. It should be noted that the approaching upper limit notification is continued until the upper limit exceeding error notification is started after the approaching upper limit notification is started. The notification may be performed only for a part of the time. For example, the notification is performed within one second after the start lever 135 is operated. On the other hand, the upper limit exceeding error notification is performed during one game. For example, when it is known that the privilege period of the AT game or the like is short even when the upper limit imminent notification is started, it is possible to easily prioritize the remaining AT game or the like. Furthermore, when the upper limit imminent notification is switched to the upper limit exceeded error notification, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification has been changed.

FIG. 82(b) is a diagram showing another example of an approaching upper limit notification.

The effect image display device 157 may perform flashing display even when the upper limit is approaching. In the example shown in FIG. 82(b), the character display of the upper limit imminent notification is displayed so as to overlap the game background display every second. Since the upper limit imminent notification is also displayed so as to overlap the game background display during the game, the game background display becomes difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid any disadvantage to the player, blinking display is performed to secure a period in which the game background display can be easily seen.

When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal number control unit 350 that includes the display number of game medals that is less than the second threshold value for payout, the first sub-control unit 400 receives an error indicating the number of game medals to be displayed. Send an error release command indicating that the error has been released. On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), execution of the upper limit approaching notification is terminated based on this error cancellation command.

Also, the second threshold for payout may be set in the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, when the information representing the "number of game medals" transmitted in the security command is equal to or larger than the second threshold for payout, the sub-control unit (400, 500) side may perform the notification that the upper limit is approaching. Then, this upper limit imminent notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "game medal count" becomes the number of coins less than the second payout threshold.

Furthermore, a second payout threshold may be set in the medal count control section 350 . In this case, the number-of-games medal control unit 350 determines whether or not the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout. A notification command is transmitted to the control unit 302, and the game control unit 302 transmits a notification command to the sub-control unit (400, 500) based on the command information. By doing so, the sub-controller (400, 500) side can also perform the upper limit imminent notification. And when it becomes less than the 2nd threshold value for payout, the notification end command is transmitted through the route of the number-of-medals control unit 350→game control unit 302→sub control unit (400, 500). It is preferable that the blinking period of the blinking display of the approaching upper limit notification be longer than the blinking period of the blinking display of the upper limit exceeded error notification. If the near-upper limit notification is switched to the upper limit exceeded error notification and the blinking period is shortened, the urgency of the notification can be easily recognized. If the near-upper-limit notification is a blinking display, the upper-limit-exceeding error notification may be displayed at all times. It becomes possible to easily recognize the degree of urgency of the notification.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which a notification prompting counting is superimposed on an error notification with high urgency.

On the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 83(a), an upper limit approaching notification is displayed overlapping the game background display. In addition, the display of the notification that the upper limit is approaching may be a constant display, but is a flashing display that is displayed every second. The front door 102 is opened while the upper limit approaching notification is being performed. When the front door 102 is opened, the game control unit 302 transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 an error generation command indicating that a door opening error has occurred. On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), error notification is performed based on this error occurrence command. With the front door 102 open, the possibility of fraud (so-called fraud) is increased, so it is necessary to close the front door 102 as soon as possible. Therefore, the error notification of the door opening error is a notification with higher urgency than the notification prompting the counting. Note that the operation of the count button 171 is accepted even when the front door 102 is open. On the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 83(a), an error notification display of a door opening error is displayed overlapping the game background display. The display of the error annunciation of the door opening error (hereinafter referred to as the door opening error display) is a text display of "the door is open" and is always displayed. This door open error display is displayed on the same layer as the display of the approaching upper limit notification, but it may be displayed on a layer before the display of the approaching upper limit notification so that it overlaps the display of the approaching upper limit notification. . Alternatively, since the door open error display is always displayed, it is displayed on the layer behind the blinking upper limit notification, and the always displayed door open error display overlaps the blinking upper limit approaching notification display. You may do so.

FIG. 83(b) shows that the character display of the warning that the upper limit is approaching is displayed every one second in response to the door open error display which is always displayed. On the right side of FIG. 83(b), the character display of the warning that the upper limit is approaching disappears due to blinking display, and the door open error display of the remaining constant display is displayed. In the state shown on the right side, it is easy to see the highly urgent door open error display. Also, the speaker 272 outputs a sound such as "The door is open" as an error notification of a door open error, but does not output a notification sound for an approaching upper limit notification.

Although the errors are not as urgent as the door open error, "Please stop the rotating reel", "A communication error has occurred, which is suspected of disconnection of wiring, disconnection of wiring, or power failure of the rental machine 700". ” may be displayed to request improvement, and together with these displays, a notification prompting counting may also be performed.

FIG. 84(a) is a diagram showing an example in which the notification prompting the counting continues even after transitioning to the demonstration display.

In the slot machine 100, a bet is made during the period from when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped if there is no payout, and after the completion of the payout if there is a payout, until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. If no operation has been performed, the state shifts to the demonstration state (demonstrating). Also, when the settlement button 134 is operated, the display shifts to the demonstration.

In the example shown in FIG. 84(a), during a game (during a bet, during 110 to 112 rotations of the reels, or during a payout), character display of the upper limit imminent notification is started, and a transition is made to the demonstration without the counting button 171 being operated. . In the performance image display device 157, the game background display was displayed during the game, but is switched to the demonstration display during the demonstration. The demo display is a display that introduces stories and characters. Even if the game moves to the middle of the demo, the character display of the approaching upper limit information is continued unless the "number of game medals" becomes less than the second payout threshold. Players are more likely to leave from now on if they transition during the demo. By encouraging the operation of the counting button 171 even during the demonstration, it may be possible to prevent the player from taking out only the cards from the lending machine 700 and leaving the slot machine 100 while leaving game medals. The blinking display of the approaching upper limit notification may be continued to ensure the visibility of the demonstration display, or the blinking display of the approaching upper limit notification may be displayed at all times to ensure the visibility of the approaching upper limit notification.

FIG. 84(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification after the count button 171 is operated during the demonstration.

A demonstration display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 84(b). The notification prompting the count is displayed in the largest size so as to overlap the demonstration display. In this case, since the operation of the count button 171 is desired to be performed preferentially, the notification prompting the count is displayed in the largest size. In addition, below that, a caution display is displayed to prevent the card from being stolen while the user is away from the desk, saying, "Be careful not to forget to remove the card or have it stolen." Also, in this example, the "number of game medals" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and "15300" exceeding the second payout threshold is displayed. In addition, "16383", which is the payout threshold value, may be displayed. The display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 may be displayed all the time, may be displayed temporarily, or may not be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 84(a). good.

Eventually, the count button 171 is operated, and the "number of game medals" is reduced to less than the second payout threshold. Then, the notification prompting the counting disappears (becomes hidden), and this time, the warning display is displayed in the largest size and stands out. It should be noted that the display of "the number of game medals" displayed at the lower right of the effect image display device 157 has decreased to "14950".

FIG. 85(a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a prescribed number such as a payout threshold value or a second payout threshold value and then falls below the prescribed number.

In FIG. 85(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed as X medals. The X number of coins corresponds to a prescribed number such as a payout threshold value or a second payout threshold value. On the effect image display device 157, a notification prompting counting is displayed because the "number of game medals" has exceeded the specified number. When the notification prompting the counting is displayed, the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and the "number of game medals" immediately becomes less than the prescribed number. Here, the long press operation of the counting button 171 is continued. In this example, even if the "number of game medals" is less than the prescribed number, the notification to prompt the counting is continued. That is, the notification prompting the counting is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes smaller than the specified number by a predetermined number (for example, 50×100 for two times). The arrow of the notification period in the figure represents the period during which the notification prompting the counting such as "Please operate the counting button" is performed.

If you set the specification to start notification when the specified number is reached and immediately end the notification when the specified number is reached, there is a high possibility that only a small number will be counted, and in this example, the specified number to start notification Continue reporting until the number is less than . By doing so, it is possible to reduce repetition of notification and counting operations. It should be noted that the notification prompting the counting may be performed within a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the number of game medals. They can be encouraged to count large numbers.

The prescribed number may be a settlement threshold, a lending threshold, or any other threshold.

In addition, when the "number of game medals" falls below the prescribed number due to a betting operation, the number of "game medals" is reduced by the predetermined number, although the maximum number of medals is reduced by three in the first place. The notification prompting the count may be continued regardless of the value.

FIG. 85(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification prompting counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over a plurality of games.

When the "number of game medals" in a certain game exceeds the second payout threshold (15000 in this example), a notification prompting counting is started. The notification prompting the counting is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. Even if the notification prompting the counting is started, the player continues the game without operating the counting button 171. - 特許庁As a result, the game continues without the "number of game medals" falling below the second payout threshold. Here, when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold value for payout, a notification prompting the counting is performed once in a plurality of games (four games in this example). Therefore, the notification prompting the counting is not performed for three games after the notification prompting the counting is performed. During the three games in which the notification prompting the counting is not performed, the effect display such as the game background display displayed on the effect image display device 157 becomes easy to see, and the interest in the game may be improved. It should be noted that when the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold, the notification prompting the counting is no longer performed. Therefore, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during three games in which the count prompting notification is not performed, the count prompting notification will not be performed until the next payout second threshold value is exceeded. can't break On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during the game in which the notification prompting counting is being performed, the notification prompting counting that has been performed until then disappears (is hidden). ).

Next, the notification regarding counting will be further described.

FIG. 86(a) is a diagram showing an example of performing a notification prompting counting each time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number. 86 ((a) to (c)) show the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. As shown in FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 86(a), every time the "number of game medals" increases by 1000, a notification prompting the counting is performed. First, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000, the effect image display device 157 displays that the number of medals exceeds 1000 and prompts the user to count. These displays continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time, or continue to be displayed until the "number of game medals" changes next time (same hereafter). Therefore, it is displayed even during the game. Next, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 2000, the effect image display device 157 displays that the number of medals exceeds 2000 and prompts the user to count. Furthermore, when the “number of game medals” exceeds 3000, the effect image display device 157 displays that the number of medals exceeds 3000 and prompts the user to count. After that, these notifications are repeated until the number of sheets exceeds 14,000. Then, when the "number of game medals" reaches 15,000, which is the second payout threshold, the display prompting the counting is continued unless the "number of game medals" becomes less than 15,000 as shown in FIG. 82(a). will be displayed. When the number of medals reaches 15,000, the message "15,000 or more" and the display prompting the count may be displayed continuously, or the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold. If it is equal to or less than the payout threshold, the real value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 may be displayed (for example, "15015 medals" is displayed). Since the number of game medals is displayed periodically, the player can roughly grasp the number of game medals without looking at the game medal number display device 170.例文帳に追加Even in the unlikely event that a problem occurs in the game machine and the "number of game medals" disappears, the number of lost medals can be easily grasped. In addition, a display prompting for counting may be performed according to the elapsed time after starting a privilege game such as an AT game. For example, after starting a privilege game such as an AT game, a display prompting counting is performed when 10 minutes have passed, a display prompting counting is performed when 20 minutes have passed, and a count is performed when 30 minutes have passed is displayed. The display can be performed periodically regardless of the number of game medals.

FIG. 86(b) is a diagram showing an example when the count button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player.

Here, the state advantageous to the player is the AT state. During the AT state, the "number of game medals" tends to increase due to the payout. During the AT state game, the effect image display device 157 displays a display (AT game display) that suggests or indicates that the player is currently in the AT state. When the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000 during the AT state, as in the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. is displayed. In this example, the count button 171 is kept pressed for a long time, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a certain value ("100" in this example).

Here, the state advantageous to the player means a state in which the "number of game medals" can be easily increased by paying out. Therefore, it is not limited to the AT state, and may be in a bonus (RB, BB) operating state or in an ART state. If the player is in an advantageous state, the "number of game medals" is expected to increase, and it can be said that the total number of game medals can be counted (output to the lending machine 700). However, if all game medals are counted, the number of inserted medals (for example, 3) in the next game will also be counted, and the next game cannot be played unless the tokens are borrowed from the lending machine 700. end up In addition, even if the game is in an advantageous state, it happens that the "number of game medals" is consumed more than the payout. Therefore, even if the player is in an advantageous state, a notification is made to the effect that a small number of "game medals" should be left. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 86(b) is in a state where the "number of game medals" has decreased to 100 due to counting in the AT state, and the effect image display device 157 displays "Stop counting. Please proceed with the game", a notification (counting end induction notification) is made to the effect that a small number of "game medals" should be left. In other words, before the counting of all game medals is completed, the counting end guidance notification is performed. Note that instead of the counting end guidance notification shown here, a notification such as "It is good to leave the game value" or a notification such as "If all are counted, the game cannot be played" may be used. In other words, the defect in the case where all game medals are counted may be reported before all the game medals are counted.

In the slot machine 100 in the example of FIG. 86(b), the automatic counting described above is not performed, and counting ends when the counting button 171 is released. In this example, when the player sees the notification that a few "game medals" should be left, the player releases the count button 171, and counting ends when 50 is left as the "game medals". are doing.

FIG. 86(c) is a diagram showing an example in which the counting button 171 is operated in a state disadvantageous to the player.

The state disadvantageous to the player here means a state in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease as the game is played repeatedly without lending. For example, a normal state can be mentioned. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(c) displays a display (normal game display) that suggests or indicates the normal state.

In the example shown in FIG. 86(c), the long press operation of the count button 171 is continued in a state where the "number of game medals" is 1000, and the "number of game medals" reaches a certain value ("100" in this example). exceeding and declining. If the player is in a disadvantageous state, the possibility of the player continuing the game after counting is finished is low. In this example, the long-pressing operation of the count button 171 is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes zero. When the "number of game medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays a character display of "please stop counting".

FIG. 87(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 86(b). The following description focuses on differences from the example shown in FIG. 86(b).

In the example shown in FIG. 87(a), the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and when the "number of game medals" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting operation continues. To temporarily invalidate the counting operation even if the operation is continued. That is, even if the long-pressing operation of the count button 171 is continued, the counting is once terminated. As a result, the decrease in the "number of game medals" temporarily stops. FIG. 87(a) shows the effect image display device 157 when the "number of game medals" has decreased to 50, and the display screen displays the message "counting is finished". ing. A new operation of the counting button 171 is required to restart the counting that has once been forcibly terminated.

FIG. 87(b) is a diagram showing an example in which counting that has been forcibly terminated once is restarted.

The example shown in FIG. 87(b) is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 87(a). Since it has decreased to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting is forced to end once. In this example, the player has a reason to stop the game even in an advantageous state, and the player operates the counting button 171 again. That is, the player presses the counting button 171 again. In this modification, when the "number of game medals" becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, counting by "50" by long-pressing the count button 171 is not effective, and even if the long-pressing operation is performed, only "1" is counted. That is, every time the counting timing (300 ms) arrives, the "number of game medals" is decreased by "1". This is because, for the same reason as described above, if all game medals are counted, the number of inserted medals in the next game (for example, 3) is also counted. Since the next game cannot be played, only "1" is counted in order to make it difficult for the number of game medals to reach 0.

Eventually, when the number of game medals becomes 0, the effect image display device 157 displays a character display of "counting finished".

It should be noted that when the player long presses the counting button 171 again, counting by "50" may be started. In this example, since the number of game medals has decreased to "50", it becomes "0" at once, and the output of the "number of game medals" to the lending machine 700 is quickly completed.

The example shown in FIG. 87(c) is an example of the modified example described with reference to FIGS. In the modified example as well, if the player is in a disadvantageous state, as in the example shown in FIG. When the "number of medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays a character display of "Please stop counting".

However, even if the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, normal state), in order to give the player motivation to continue the game, the same processing as in the case of the player's advantageous state (Fig. 87(a) and The process shown in FIG. 86(b) or the process shown in FIG. 86(b)) may be performed.

[Example of operation when VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off]
Next, an example in which the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off will be described.

FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off.

A VL signal is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state. If the VL signal is in an off state, it is suspected that the power of the lending machine 700 is not turned on, and lending and counting may not be possible. It is also conceivable that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected.

The medal number control section 350 transmits VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off to the game control section 302 by means of a command in which the upper byte of the medal number control state command shown in FIG. 11 is 01H. When the game control unit 302 receives the VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off, the determination result in step S1007 shown in FIG. I can't proceed. For this reason, even if the start lever 135 is operated, the operation is not valid, and even if the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated, the operation is not valid. That is, some of the game progress operations, which are of a plurality of types, are invalidated. In this embodiment, some of the operations are intended for operations performed in the first half of one game. Therefore, if the VL signal is turned off after the first half of the operation starts the game (reel rotation is started), the second half of the operation (operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation)) is valid. be. Therefore, although the game is limited, it can be advanced. If the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 becomes invalid while the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is being waited for, the operation is enabled and it is necessary to wait for the timing from scratch, which may give a troublesome impression. , the possibility of giving this troublesome impression can be reduced. Furthermore, even though the counting is not possible, if the operation of the game progress operation until it is determined by lottery as to whether the internal winning is appropriate or not is enabled, for example, a result advantageous to the player can be obtained, resulting in a sudden and grand event. When the performance is started, there is a possibility that the player's desire to proceed with the game is heightened. As a result, although there was a possibility that a response action would be delayed when the VL signal is turned off, the possibility of this delay can be reduced. However, the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 may be disabled. It is possible to quickly inform the player that the VL signal has turned off. Even if the VL signal is turned off, it is not handled as an error on the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no notification regarding this is made. Also, if it is treated as an error, an error cancellation operation is required, but if the VL signal is in an off state, an abnormality on the lending machine 700 side is suspected, so an error cancellation operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). don't even ask. It should be noted that, as in the following example, a configuration may be employed in which an error is notified while the VL signal is off.

FIG. 88(a) shows whether the operation (insertion) of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation (insertion/lever operation) of the start lever 135 (lever) are treated as valid or invalid. there is Below that, the value of the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Further, the state of the VL signal is shown below it.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), when the VL signal is on, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as valid operations. Also, an error notification, which will be described later, is not performed.

When the VL signal is turned off, the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an error notification display. On the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 88(a), a character display such as "Communication with rental machine not established" is displayed. As the error notification, it may be notified that the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 is invalid. For example, a character display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid" or a character display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid because communication with the lending machine is not established" may be displayed.

Next, a modified example of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, regardless of the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, when the VL signal is turned off, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. , in the modified examples described below, the correspondence differs depending on the value of the "number of game medals". That is, in the first modification, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are in a state ( If the VL signal is turned off in the state of, for example, 980 sheets as shown in FIG. 88(a), it is treated as an invalid operation. A small number of "game medals" means that the player can end the game at any time. encourage repair. On the other hand, even if the VL signal is turned off while the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the certain threshold value, it is treated as a valid operation.

FIG. 88(b) shows a first modification in which the "number of game medals" is 15550, which is equal to or greater than 15000, which is the second payout threshold.

When the "number of game medals" reaches the payout threshold, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the next game insertion operation (operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132) is disabled, and the opportunity to operate the start lever 135 and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are eliminated.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 88(b), when the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, the "number of game medals" eventually reaches the threshold for payout, and the next game can be played. Until that happens, we don't stop the progress of the game so that the players can enjoy it. Further, the continuation of the game even if the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold often means that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, AT state, etc.), and the game is played in this state. There is a high possibility that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced if the game is stopped.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 88(b), the progress of the game does not stop even if the VL signal is turned off. is displayed.

FIG. 89 shows a second modification in which the operation differs depending on whether or not the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold.

The state shown in FIG. 89(a) is a state in which the number of game medals is 14000, which is less than a certain threshold value (15000 which is the second payout threshold value in this example as well). In the second modification, even if the VL signal is turned off in this state, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. Therefore, operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and operation of the start lever 135 are effective. However, even in the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off, the effect image display device 157 displays an error notification.

The state shown in FIG. 89(b) is a state in which the number of game medals is 15550, which is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value (second payout threshold value). In the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off in this state, some of the multiple types of game progress operations are disabled. That is, the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 performed in the first half of one game are invalidated. Also, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

The second modification shown in FIG. 89 is the exact opposite of the first modification, but the fact that the "number of game medals" is small means that there is a possibility that the game has just started, and the progress of the game that has just started is not hindered. There is an aim. In addition, it cannot be said that there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" will disappear even if any trouble occurs in the slot machine 100, so the "number of game medals" is large. If the "number of game medals" disappears in this state, the disadvantage will increase. Therefore, when the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value (second payout threshold value), the progress of the game is stopped, and early repair by the clerk is urged. In addition, the fact that the number of "game medals" is large means that it is not strange for the player to perform counting operation at any time. , with the aim of encouraging early repair by the store clerk.

From the above explanation, the method of responding to the turn-off of the VL signal also changes depending on the value of the "number of game medals" and whether the state is favorable or unfavorable to the player. It should be noted that the term "advantageous state" for the player means a state in which the "number of game medals" can be easily increased by paying out (for example, AT state, ART state, BB state, BR state, etc.), and is referred to as a disadvantageous state. is a state (for example, normal state) in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease as the game continues.

When the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold in a state that is disadvantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. At least some operations are disabled. On the other hand, when the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value in a state advantageous to the player, as shown in FIG. All operations of operations are treated as valid operations.

Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. All operations of operations may be treated as valid operations. On the other hand, when the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold in a state advantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. At least some of the operations may be disabled.

When the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value in a state disadvantageous to the player, the player may end the game at any time. Therefore, when the VL signal is turned off, at least one of a plurality of types of game progress operations is performed in order to quickly make the player aware that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established and to prompt the clerk to repair it early. operation is disabled. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold in a state that is advantageous to the player, there is a possibility that the state has just become advantageous. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations so as not to interfere with the progress of the game.

Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, counting may not be necessary. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations may be treated as valid operations so as not to interfere with the progress of the game. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a state advantageous to the player, the player is notified early before the "number of game medals" exceeds the certain threshold value, and the clerk In order to promote early restoration by , when the VL signal is turned off, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations may be disabled.

FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off.

In the above explanation, even if the VL signal is turned off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no error cancellation operation is requested for the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). However, in the example shown in FIG. 90(a), it is treated as an error on the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) side, and an error cancellation operation for the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) is also requested. It is highly possible that the VL signal is turned off because the power supply of the renting machine 700 is not turned on or the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the renting machine 700 is disconnected. Therefore, even if the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) performs an error cancellation operation, there is a high possibility that the error will occur again. However, by making an error, the clerk can be called, and the clerk can turn on the rental machine 700 .

The example shown in FIG. 90(b) is an example in which the game can proceed until the counting button 171 is operated even if the VL signal is turned off.

In the example shown in FIG. 90(b), even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. When the VL signal is turned off, it means that communication with the rented machine 700 is not established, and the rented machine 700 can also determine that there is an abnormality and issue an error notification. If the lending machine 700 issues an error notification immediately after the VL signal is turned off, the clerk can be called even if the slot machine 100 does not immediately issue an error notification. Further, since communication with the rented machine 700 has not been established, the counting notification may not be sent to the rented machine 700 even if the counting button 171 is operated. Therefore, in this example, the slot machine 100 side makes a notification at the timing when the counting button 171 is operated. By doing so, the slot machine 100 side can perform notification at the minimum opportunity, and by suppressing excessive notification, the player can comfortably proceed with the game.

After detecting the operation of the count button 171, the slot machine 100 side continues to inform until the VL signal is turned back on.

[Regarding the difference between payout and counting process]
If the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in a game state advantageous to the player such as the AT state or the bonus state is greater than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, it is advantageous to the player. In such a state, it becomes difficult to finish the counting process. For example, the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10, and if it is possible to count less than 10 in the shortest time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game If the number of game medals is counted while the AT game is being played, the number of game medals will continue to increase. Therefore, when an effect accompanying counting is performed while the AT game is progressing, the execution period of this effect becomes long, and for example, it is difficult to perform an effect with an ending scene in anticipation of the end of the counting. Also, when a counting effect (FIG. 63, etc.) is executed in relation to the counting process, this counting effect interferes with other effects, and the interest in the game is reduced. On the other hand, by designing so that the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous game state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, such a problem can be made less likely to occur. can be done. For example, the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10, and if it is possible to count more than 10 in the shortest time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game When the counting is performed while the number of game medals is counted, the number of game medals continues to decrease during the AT game. For example, if it is possible to count 50 sheets every 300 ms when the count button 171 is kept pressed, it is possible to expect a decrease of about 700 sheets in 4.1 seconds. Therefore, when the production accompanying the counting is performed while the AT game is progressing, the prospect of the end of the execution period of this production can be obtained. It should be noted that, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability increases) according to the execution time of the counting process.

Note that the counting effect is not limited to the configuration in which the counting effect is ended in accordance with the counting process, and the counting effect may be ended even when the counting process is continuing. The execution time of the counting process for transferring the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 becomes longer as the number of game medals increases. For this reason, if the counting effect is uniformly executed in accordance with the execution period of the counting process, the interest in the game decreases due to the counting effect being executed for a long time, and the counting effect hinders other effects. Problems can arise. Such a problem can sometimes be prevented by ending the counting effect even while the counting process is continuing. In addition, as such a configuration, for example, the counting effect is ended depending on the game situation or the passage of time, or the counting effect is ended when the content determined as the counting effect is executed. . In addition, when the counting process ends before these conditions for ending the counting effect are satisfied, the counting effect may be terminated or the counting effect may be continued.

Further, the content of the counting effect may be changed according to the number of game medals counted. In this case, the effect content may be set based on the amount of game medals in the counting process, or the effect content may be set based on the cumulative amount of game medals in the counting process in an advantageous state. can be Further, for example, when the number of game medals counted exceeds a predetermined value, the setting suggesting effect may be executed (or the execution probability increases). After the player has obtained a large number of game medals, the player can perform counting processing and select a game play. It should be noted that, regarding the counting effect corresponding to the number of game medals, if the counting process and the counting effect are terminated in the middle due to reasons such as unintentionally releasing the counting button 171, the interest in the game will decrease. There is a risk that it will be lost. For this reason, even after the counting effect has ended in the middle, if a new counting process is started within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from there, the immediately preceding counting effect It is also possible to restart the count effect that has been lost) from the middle. In addition, the counting effect is continuously executed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) after the counting process ends, and a new counting process is started while the counting effect continues. In this case, the counting effect being executed may be continued as it is. With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the counting effect from disappearing due to the end of the counting process due to an unintended operation. Note that the predetermined time may be the same as the determination time of the long press of the counting button 171, for example.

Further, for example, when operating the count button 171 while performing a game progress operation, it is difficult to further operate the effect button. If an effect requiring an operation on the operating means is executed during execution of the counting effect, there is a risk of inducing an erroneous operation. Therefore, during the execution of the counting effect, the effect requiring operation of some operation means may not be executed (or the execution probability may be reduced). In addition, it is also possible to similarly limit effects that are extremely difficult to recognize when executed at the same time as the counting effects. That is, it may be configured to provide an effect that is restricted while the counting effect is being executed. In addition, it does not have to be an effect that requires the operation of the operation means, for example, an effect with a freeze that prevents the game from progressing, or an effect that takes a long time to run and the result is not known until the end. may

It should be noted that, for example, when the counting process is started while the side lamps are lighting, which is an effect in an advantageous state, the effect by the side lamps changes to that by the counting effect, and so on. may be replaced with a counting effect. Also, when some kind of effect is started during execution of the counting effect, the counting effect may be replaced by an effect to be executed later.

In addition, the content of the counting effect changes according to the degree of progress of the game during the execution of the counting process, such as the character changing (for example, growing) when the game progresses during the execution of the counting process. can be

Further, when the number of game medals becomes 0 and the counting process and the counting effect are completed, by keeping the counting button 171 pressed, if the number of game medals is newly acquired and the counting process is started, immediately before The finished counting effect may be restarted from the continuation.

Also, during execution of the counting process, at least a part of the game progress operation during execution of the counting process may be restricted such that the next game start operation cannot be performed.

[Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting]
In the embodiment described above, by pressing the count button 171 for a long time, the number of game medals up to 50 can be transferred to the lending machine 700 . FIG. 91(a) shows a change in the number of game medals when the counting button 171 is pressed long from the state where there are 120 game medals. Specifically, 50 game medals out of 120 are transferred to the lending machine 700, then 50 game medals out of the remaining 70 are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the remaining 20 are transferred to the lending machine 700. The flow until all the number of game medals is transferred to the lending machine 700 and the number of game medals becomes zero is shown.

In the counting process, the current value of the number of game medals is temporarily set as the number of game medals for counting determination (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the counting process is executed based on this number of game medals for counting determination. (Fig. 34). At this time, if there is an increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) after the number of game medals for count determination is set, the content is reflected in the number of game medals for count determination that is set next. FIG. 91(b) shows the change in the number of game medals when 8 coins are paid out while the number of 70 game medals is transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 91(a). It is In this example, 50 of the remaining 70 game medals have been transferred to the lending machine 700, so that the remaining 20 game medals are added to the remaining 28 game medals by adding 8 payouts. After that, all the remaining game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the game medals become zero.

In the above-described embodiment, as in the example of FIG. 91(b), the increase in the number of game medals (payout and settlement operation) during the counting process is , and the number of game medals (120 in FIG. 91(b)) at the time of starting the counting process does not match the number of game medals (128 in FIG. 91(b)) transferred by the counting process, and the counting process There is a possibility that it will become a work burden when there is a situation to check the data of In such a case, as shown in FIG. 91(c), the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) during the counting process is not immediately reflected. becomes 0, or the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals becomes 0, thereby ending the counting process that has been continued. For example, when the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time, after counting 120 cards stored when the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time, 8 cards, which increased during the long pressing of the counting button 171, are counted. do. For example, when the long press of the counting button 171 is released in the middle, 60 sheets out of 120 stored when the long pressing of the counting button 171 is started are counted, and then the long pressing of the counting button 171 is resumed. Sometimes count the 68 memorized. After restarting, since the number of game medals at the time of starting the counting process is 68, the 68 medals are counted in the order of 50→18. In FIG. 91(c), while 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 91(a), there are 8 payouts. does not reflect this increase (the same flow as in FIG. 91(a)), the increase is reflected after the number of game medals reaches 0, and the counting process continues until the number of game medals reaches 0. It is shown that In this configuration, the number of game medals (120 in FIG. 91(c)) at the start of the counting process and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process until the number of game medals once becomes 0 (FIG. 91(c) 120 sheets) can be matched.

In addition, in FIG. 91(e), 8 coins are paid out while 70 game medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 91(a). Immediately after counting the 120 cards stored at the start of the game, the 8 cards paid out are counted. With this configuration, the time required for counting can be shortened.

It should be noted that if the number of game medals increases multiple times while the counting process is being continued, the total value of all these may be reflected later, or the counting process may be continued. If there is, it may be reflected one by one each time the number of game medals becomes zero.

The display of the game medal number display device 170 in the case of adopting the above configuration may also be displayed in accordance with the change in the game medal number. Further, the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) while the counting process is being continued may be immediately reflected on the display (reflected in the decrease display of the number of game medals). However, regarding the amount of change in the value due to the counting process in this case, the value of the actual number of game medals and the value of the number of game medals on the display are the same (a state in which there is an increase in deviation). FIG. 91(d) shows a flow when adopting a configuration in which an increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) is immediately reflected on the display in contrast to the flow of FIG. 91(c). there is In this configuration, the value of the actual number of game medals and the value of the displayed number of game medals are in a state of deviation by the amount of the above increase, but they are in a state of matching at the end of the counting process. Even if the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 to end the counting process, the increase is reflected in the number of game medals at that time. The value of the number of game medals on the display becomes the same.

The timing for reflecting the increase in the number of game medals during the counting process is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is released. In this case, by operating the count button 171 again, the reflected increment can be transferred to the lending machine 700 . Alternatively, it may be the timing when the number of game medals becomes 0 while the counting process is being continued. It may be possible to transfer (the counting process continues, FIG. 91(e)).

The increase in the number of game medals may be due to the payout or settlement operation, but either one of these may be the object of the configuration described in FIG. 91(c), or both may be the object.

[Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]
In the above-described embodiment, if you wish to change the number of game medals to bet 1 after betting 3 game medals, operate the checkout button 134 to return the 3 bets to the "number of game medals". By operating the bet button 130 for betting one coin again, the current number of bets can be reduced to one. In this case, it is necessary to operate the settlement button 134 and the bet button 130, but it may be configured so that these operations can be executed by operating the bet button 130 once. As an example of such a configuration, when the bet button 130 is operated while the current number of bets is the maximum value, there is a configuration in which the settlement button process (FIG. 18) is executed and then the process for the bet button operation is executed. mentioned. Also, when the bet button 130 is operated with the current bet number at the maximum value, the amount of change when the bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value (in the above example, the difference is 2) is taken as the settlement number. Along with sending the settlement command (FIG. 13), the value of the current bet may be set to the minimum value. In this configuration, a portion of the bet amount is settled by operating the bet button 130, and separate input processing and input commands are not required. These configurations are examples of configurations in which the current bet number is set to the minimum value based on the operation of the operating means capable of setting the minimum bet amount when the current bet number is at the maximum value. Equivalent to.

In addition, when the above configuration is adopted, by repeating the operation of the bet button 130, the current bet number can be changed in the order of 0→1→2→3→1→2 . . . You can change the current bet setting.

If there is a settlement sound that can be output in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 and a bet sound that can be output in response to the operation of the bet button 130, the bet button 130 when the current bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value For the operation of , the settlement sound and the input sound may be output in succession. However, if two types of sounds are output for one operation, the player may be confused. , the input sound may be output without outputting the settlement sound. In response to the operation of the settlement button 134, characters or the like indicating that the settlement has been made are displayed on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and the operation of the bet button 130 when the current bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value. On the other hand, the screen of the effect image display device 157 may not display characters or the like indicating that the payment has been made. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the settlement button 134 has been operated instead of the bet button 130 .

[Regarding the production according to the number of game medals]
Hereinafter, a configuration for executing different effects according to the number of game medals will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed according to the number of game medals.

In the above embodiment, information on the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 via the game control unit 302 (medal number control state command and security command ). The following example is an example of the operation of executing different effects according to the value of the number of game medals. In this example, in the AT state, a normal effect is executed until the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000 in this example), and a special effect is executed when the predetermined number is reached.

First, FIG. 92(a1) shows the state at the start of the AT state (the number of game medals at the start=500), and FIG. 92(a2) shows the state of the game in the AT state. FIG. 92(a3) shows the state when medals are won in the AT state, and FIG. 92(a4) shows the state when the AT state ends. In the AT state, the value of the number of game medals is displayed as the value of "Possessed" in the upper left of the screen, and the number of medals acquired after entering the AT state is displayed in the "... GET" section in the upper right of the screen. is displayed.

In the flow of FIGS. 92(a1) to (a4), since the number of game medals does not exceed 3000 in the AT state, the normal effect (FIG. 92(a2)) is executed without executing the special effect.

Next, FIGS. 92(b1) to (b3) show an example in which a special effect is executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this example, the state in which the normal effect is executed because the number of game medals has not reached the predetermined number (FIG. 92 (b1)) is changed to the state in which the number of game medals has reached the predetermined number after winning medals ( (b2) in FIG. 92), after which the special effect is executed ((b3) in FIG. 92). In this special effect, the background, the color of the operation navigation, and the BGM are different from the normal effect. That is, the effect changes in a state where many game medals have been obtained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the different effects are not limited to the example of the special effects described above, and various effects can be used. This different effect is not limited to a configuration that uses different effects, but for example, while the base effect is being executed, another effect interrupts part of it to create a different effect as a whole. good too. Further, for example, regarding the display of the number of game medals and the number of earned medals, the color of each digit is changed to make it rainbow, or the color of each digit is changed periodically. Numerical values may have different colors and sizes. Also, the state in which the effect is to be changed is not limited to the AT state, and it is sufficient if the effect is different when the state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to switching the effect immediately after the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, as long as the effect to be executed differs depending on whether the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number. The effect may be switched at the timing when the number reaches a predetermined number and some condition (for example, the number of games is completed, the switching lottery is won) is satisfied, or whether or not the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number. It is good also as a structure with a different ending.

Furthermore, when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting the set value may be executed. In the example of FIG. 92(c1), when the number of game medals has reached a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value (in this example, a family crest display) is executed at the ending.

In addition, it is not limited to the configuration in which a different effect or display is always executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but a different effect or display is more likely to be executed than when the number of game medals does not reach the predetermined number. It may be a configuration.

In addition, for example, when the number of game medals reaches 3000, the above-mentioned special effect is executed, and when the number of game medals reaches 2000, a display suggesting a set value is executed at the ending. The value of the number of game medals, which serves as a trigger for making the , may be provided separately.

In the above example, the number of game medals is used as a determination target for determining whether or not to execute a different effect or display. Even when the number of medals is used as the determination target, or the total value of the number of game medals and the number of possessed medals is used as the determination target, the same effect may be obtained. Further, the value used at this time is not limited to the total number of possessed medals, and may be a configuration in which a part thereof (for example, 1000 of the number of possessed medals of 5000) is used. When adopting such a configuration, information about the number of medals possessed may be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . If the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or the host server handles the credit balance, the value of the credit balance or the value obtained by converting the credit balance into the number of game medals is used to calculate the above number of medals. may be the same as the configuration using . In this way, the card inserted into the lending machine 700 or the information about the gaming value managed by the host server may be used as a determination target as to whether or not to execute a different effect or display.

Furthermore, for example, when the number of game medals is 2000 or more and the number of possessed medals is 5000 or more, a different effect is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of determination objects are used and the results are combined, such that different effects are executed in each case. It should be noted that the value of the determination target may not be displayed, but if the value of the determination target is displayed as in the above example, the relationship between the determination target and the effect can be grasped. It becomes easy to play, and it can be expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

Also, in the above example, the number of game medals and the number of possessed medals are used as the object for determining whether or not to execute a different effect or display, but the number of earned medals in the AT state may be used as the object for determination. FIGS. 93(d1) to (d7) show an example of a case where a special effect is executed when the number of won medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this flow, FIGS. 93(d2) to (d4) show the case where the value of the number of game medals reaches 3000 in the same manner as described with reference to FIGS. 92(b1) to (b3). However, in this example, since whether or not to execute the special effect is determined based on the number of medals won, the special effect is not executed at this point unlike in FIGS. 92(b1) to (b3). After that, the number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (here, 3000) ((d5) in FIG. 93), and then a state in which a special effect is being executed ((d6) in FIG. 93) is entered. In this example as well, the effect changes when the number of medals obtained increases, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, in this example, it is shown that setting suggestions similar to those in FIG. 92(c1) are displayed when the number of earned medals reaches 2000.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which a different effect or display is executed when the number of game medals, the number of possessed medals, or the number of earned medals reaches a predetermined number. The number of medals may be used, and the number of won medals may be used for the execution of a different part of the performance, so that each may be properly used. Further, for example, a configuration in which the effects described above can be executed in parallel, such as the effect using the number of possessed medals and the effect using the number of earned medals being executed in parallel, may be employed. In these configurations, for example, if the counting process is not executed in a state advantageous to the player, the number of won medals may exceed the number of medals possessed, and in such a situation, a different effect is executed. As described above, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of determination targets are used and the results are combined.

[About operation when errors are duplicated]
The error-related operations will be described below with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the number of game medals overflows. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the game medal number exceeding the upper limit error and the medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur at the same time.

In the above embodiment, the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100 (the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350) can be transferred to the lending machine 700 by operating the counting button 171 (counting process). In FIGS. 94(a1)-(a3), the number of game medals is 1336 (FIG. 94(a1)), the counting button 171 is operated (FIG. 94(a2)), and all the game medals are lent out. As a result of transmission to the machine 700, the value of the game medal number display device 170 (the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100) becomes 0 (FIG. 94(a3)). .

Further, in the above embodiment, 16383 is set as the upper limit value of the number of game medals, and when winning a combination with a payout, if the total of this payout and the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit value, an overflow state occurs. (The response command becomes "abnormal" in FIG. 50). In this overflow state, it can be said that it is a kind of error because it waits for resolution of the overflow state without executing the addition processing by paying out. This overflow state can be resolved by operating the count button 171 to move the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 . 94 (b1) to (b4), the number of game medals is at the upper limit value (FIG. 94 (b1)), the payout wins a win and the overflow state (FIG. 94 (b2)), After that, the count button 171 is pressed long (Fig. 94 (b3), 50 as the number of game medals is moved to the lending machine 700, and the value of the number of game medals display device 170 is decreased by 1), and the overflow state is canceled (Fig. 94 ( A series of flows up to b4)) are shown. The message "Error has been cleared" in FIG. 94(b4) indicates that the overflow state has been resolved, and is deleted after being displayed for several seconds. Also, when the overflow state is resolved, the payout amount is added to the number of game medals. In this example, the count button 171 is pressed long, but if the count button 171 is not pressed long, 1 will be transferred to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals. In this case, the overflow state can be canceled by repeatedly hitting the counting button 171 until the number of game medals becomes equal to or less than the upper limit. In any case, the overflow state can be canceled by operating the counting button 171. FIG.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, various errors (for example, the error in FIG. 9B) that hinder the progress of the game by the game control unit 302 can be detected. Since these errors require countermeasures on the side of the store, the configuration is such that the game is disabled and these errors are notified. 95(c1) to (c3) show a state in which no error has occurred (FIG. 95(c1)), a state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal count control unit (FIG. 95(c2)), and then 95 shows a series of flows from when the side takes measures and when the reset button R is operated until the state of the error is resolved (FIG. 95(c3)). In addition, the message "Error E0 resolved" in Fig. 95 (c3) indicates that the error that has occurred (in this example, the medal number control section disconnection error) has been resolved, and is displayed for several seconds. erased. The reset button R is a button for transmitting a reset signal to each control unit, and is provided inside the gaming machine so that the player cannot operate it.

As described above, in the slot machine 100 of the above embodiment, an error related to the game control unit 302 that needs to be canceled by the operation of the store (for example, a game sequence error in FIG. 9B or a chip ID number mismatch, hereinafter referred to as game control error, etc.) and an error related to the medal number control section 350 that can be canceled by the player's operation (for example, overflow state, hereinafter referred to as medal number control error). The medal number control error is an error that does not seriously affect the progress of the game compared to the game control error. Therefore, if these errors occur in duplicate, it is conceivable to preferentially resolve the game control error of high importance. An example of the operation when adopting such a configuration will be described below. In the following explanation, an example of a disconnection error of the medal number control section and an overflow state will be explained, but the error concerning the game control section 302 and the error concerning the medal number control section 350 are not limited to these errors. It can be applied to errors that employ similar clearing methods.

FIG. 96(d1) shows a state in which the number of game medals is the upper limit value, and it is assumed that a combination with a payout is won from there, resulting in an overflow state. FIG. 96(d2) shows a state in which a message prompting the user to operate the count button 171 to cancel the overflow state is displayed. The overflow state can be canceled by operating the counting button 171, but here, it is assumed that a disconnection error of the medal number control section has occurred before this operation (game control error and medal number control error overlap). . FIG. 96(d3) shows a state in which the message shown in FIG. 96(d2) is cleared and a message indicating that a disconnection error of the medal number control unit has occurred is displayed. In the above example, the message indicating the overflow state ((d2) in FIG. 96) is cleared when the medal count controller disconnection error occurs. Display a message indicating that an error has occurred superimposed on the message indicating that the overflow state has occurred, or display the overflow state in a position that does not interfere with the message indicating that the medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred. You may make it display the message about both errors, such as displaying the message which shows. Also, when displaying messages regarding both errors, a configuration may be used in which a display different from the display when an error occurs alone is used.

In a state where the game control error and the medal number control error overlap, even if the counting button 171 is operated, the counting process is not executed, so the overflow state is not released. Also, at this time, a message is displayed indicating that the operation of the counting button 171 is invalid. In FIG. 96(d4), by operating the count button 171, in addition to the message shown in FIG. A state is shown in which a message prompting the user to do so is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to preferentially process the disconnection error of the medal number control section.

After that, the store side takes measures and the reset button R is operated to eliminate the error state and return to the overflow state (elimination of duplication of game control error and medal number control error). FIG. 96(d5) shows a state in which a message indicating that the disconnection error of the medal number control unit has been resolved is displayed. FIG. 96(d6) shows that after this message is cleared, a message similar to that of FIG. 96(d2) is displayed. After that, by operating the counting button 171 as described with reference to FIG. 94, the counting process can be executed and the overflow state can be released. FIGS. 96(d7) and 96(d8) show that the count button 171 has been pressed long and the overflow state is canceled, as in FIGS. 94(b3) and 94(b4). In this case, the payout amount is added to the number of game medals after the overflow state is resolved.

It should be noted that, in order to realize the above operation, while the game control error is occurring, the processing corresponding to the operation of the operating means (in the above example, the counting button 171) used to resolve the medal number control error is not executed. good too. In FIGS. 97(e1) to (e3), the state in which no error has occurred ((e1) in FIG. 97) changes to a state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal count control unit ((e2) in FIG. 97). 97 ( e3)) is shown.

In the above example, the operation means for canceling the game control error and the operation means for canceling the medal number control error are different. Here, for example, the error canceling operation means for canceling the game control error and the medal number control error may be the same, such that any error can be canceled by the reset button R. It should be noted that the error canceling operating means at this time may be operable by the player or may be inoperable (for example, operating means installed inside the gaming machine). In the case of this configuration, if a game control error occurs while the medal number control error is occurring, the game control error is canceled by operating the operation means for error cancellation (the medal number control error is not canceled and the game Control error is preferentially canceled), it is possible to preferentially cancel the game control error of high importance.

[Notification of counting process (1)]
In a state advantageous to the player, an effect for livening up the game may be executed. A case of lowering (or muting) the noise is provided. With this configuration, the player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed by the change in the sound volume of the effect, and can be made to concentrate on the counting process. This change in volume corresponds to an example of counting notification. In addition, below, the count notification by the change of this effect sound volume is called the count notification A. FIG. Here, the configuration for changing the volume of the effect by counting processing will be mainly described, but the configuration for changing the effect in a state advantageous to the player by counting processing (for example, change in volume, change in sound quality, change in display) A part may be changed, and the color of the lamp and the lighting mode may be changed).

In some cases, a so-called demonstration effect is not executed in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state, bonus state), and a demonstration effect is executed in a state disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state). Then, the effect is continuously executed in a state advantageous to the player. The counting notification A can make the execution of the counting process known even in such a configuration.

Although the count notification A has the above effects, there is a problem that depending on the timing of execution, it may make it difficult to understand the presentation of important scenes. Here, the state in which all the reels stop rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect to be executed is less important, so all the reels stop rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting A in a state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels, there is a case where the effect of winning a prize is performed, so that a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation on the reels, and all the reels have stopped rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting A on condition that it has stopped. In addition, the counting notification A is provided on the condition that all the reels have stopped rotating after the effect due to the last stop operation on the reels has been executed (for example, when switching to the demonstration effect). It may be configured to execute. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of counting processing, a configuration (for example, a configuration aimed at reducing power consumption) in which the effect volume is lowered (or silenced) even after the time has passed since the last stop operation on the reel is adopted. In this case, the degree of volume reduction may be made different so as to be distinguished from the volume reduction due to the count notification A. Further, when the performance volume reduction due to the passage of time and the execution of the count notification A overlap, the volume reduction due to the count notification A may be prioritized.

On the other hand, when any one of the reels is spinning, the game is being executed, and the effect to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, it may be configured such that the count notification A is not executed while any reel is rotating.

Also, depending on the operation during the game, there is a case where an effect is executed with this as a trigger. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 may trigger the production of the next game. There is a case where the operation of the operating means is triggered to execute an effect that enhances the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification A being executed is terminated (for example, the changed sound volume is returned) triggered by an operation on some operation means.

In the above description, whether or not to output a counting sound is determined according to the number of counted sheets (eg, FIG. 63), or the counting sound is varied according to the operation time of the counting button 171 (eg, FIG. 63). 63), but when the counting notification A is executed, a counting sound corresponding to such counting processing may be added. Further, for example, the count notification A is executed only when all the reels are not rotating, while the count sound is always output to the counting process. Alternatively, a counting sound may be output separately from the counting notification A. The counting sound added here is set to 50% volume while the reels are rotating, and set to 100% volume while the reels are stopped. may be added. In addition, not only the counting sound but also various effects corresponding to the counting process (for example, counting sound output, count display related to the counting process, and combinations thereof) may be combined with the count notification A. Examples of various effects for such counting processing include outputting a counting sound in accordance with the execution of the counting processing, and counting display is allowed to be executed after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels are stopped). (only counting sound is output during reel rotation). As another example, a counting sound is output in accordance with the execution of the counting process, and the counting display is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the end of the game (after the third stop operation, after all the reels are stopped). After), execution is permitted (only counting sound is output during reel rotation).

[Notification of counting process (2)]
In the above description, whether or not to output a counting sound is determined according to the number of counted pieces (eg, FIG. 63), or the counting sound is varied according to the operation time of the counting button 171 (eg, FIG. 63). , a configuration for outputting a counting sound corresponding to the counting process is mentioned.

In a state advantageous to the player, an effect may be executed to liven up the game, but the configuration described below can output a counting sound while the counting button 171 is being operated (counting process). In addition, a case is provided in which the production sound in an advantageous state is maintained. With this configuration, there are cases where the effect sound in an advantageous state is maintained even during the counting process, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being diminished. In addition, the player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed by the counting sound. This counting sound corresponds to an example of counting notification. Note that the counting notification by the counting sound will be referred to as counting notification B hereinafter.

While the counting notification B has the above effect, there is a problem that depending on the timing of execution, it may make it difficult to understand the presentation of important scenes. Here, the state in which all the reels stop rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect to be executed is less important, so all the reels stop rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting B in a state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels, there is a case where the effect of winning a prize is performed, so that a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation on the reels, and all the reels have stopped rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting B on condition that it has stopped. In addition, counting notification B is provided on the condition that all reels have stopped rotating after the effect due to the final stop operation on the reels has been executed (for example, when switching to the demonstration effect). It may be configured to execute.

On the other hand, when any one of the reels is spinning, the game is being executed, and the effect to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, it may be configured such that the count notification B is not executed while any reel is rotating.

Also, depending on the operation during the game, there is a case where an effect is executed with this as a trigger. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 may trigger the production of the next game. There is a case where the operation of the operating means is triggered to execute an effect that enhances the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification B is not executed after some operation means is operated.

In the above description, the case where the count notification B is executed and the case where it is not executed have been described. For example, a different melody, different timbre, number of sounds, volume, etc.) may be substituted for this. That is, the case where the counting sound B is executed is read as the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting warning B is not executed is the case where the counting sound of the second mode is output. good. Since there are various types of sounds, for example, if the counting sound of the second mode is a type of sound that does not hinder the production of an advantageous state, the counting process is executed without reducing the interest in the game. It is possible to make the player grasp that the game is in progress.

Furthermore, for example, when the counting sound of the first mode is output, the counting effect of the first mode is executed, and when the counting sound of the second mode is output, the counting effect of the second mode is executed. , and may be replaced with each other. Since there are various types of effects other than voice, for example, if the second aspect of the counting effect is a type of effect that does not hinder the effect of an advantageous state, the interest in the game is not diminished. The player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed.

[Example of notification of counting process]
A specific example of the configuration of the count notification (count notification A, count notification B) described above will be described below with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a sound output permission period is provided in outputting the counting sound for the counting process. 99 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 98(a), and FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 98(b).

Both FIGS. 98(a) and 98(b) show a configuration in which the output of the counting sound is permitted after a predetermined time has passed since the third stop operation in the AT state, and the counting sound stops when the betting operation is performed. It is an example of operation. FIGS. 98(a) and 98(b) show a period during which this counting sound is permitted and a period during which the counting sound is output in response to the operation of the counting button 171 within this period. In the AT state, the AT effect sound corresponding to the AT state is continuously output except when the counting sound is output.

The example of FIG. 98(a) shows the timing (a1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 99(a1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this case, FIG. 99(a2) shows an example in which operation navigation is displayed at the timing (a2) after the start operation. Also, as shown in FIGS. 99(a2) to (a7), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as the value of "possessed", and in the upper right frame is obtained in the AT state. The total number of game medals played shall be displayed.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the count button 171 is long-pressed after the third stop operation and before the bet button is operated for the next game. FIG. 98(a) shows the operating period of the counting button 171. FIG. Timings (a3) to (a7) shown in FIG. 98(a) will be described in order below.

First, the timing (a3) is the timing after the third stop operation and before the counting button 171 is operated. FIG. 99(a3) shows how, at this timing (a3), an effect for winning a role (here, 8 game medals are won) is being executed.

The subsequent timing (a4) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the third stop operation. At this timing (a4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the display of FIG. 99(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 99(a4), and the AT effect sound continues as it is. there is When the counting button 171 is operated, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed. It is shown that the values of the numbers are starting to decrease.

The subsequent timing (a5) is the timing at which the counting sound is permitted while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time. At this timing (a5), the display of FIG. 99(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 99(a5), but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . Then, by operating the count button 171, the characters "counting" are continuously displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (a6) is the timing when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (a6), the display of FIG. 99(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 99(a6). Further, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the output of the AT effect sound is resumed. Note that the characters "counting" in the frame on the upper left of the screen have been erased.

The subsequent timing (a7) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated. At this timing (a7), the background display of FIG. 99(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 99(a7). Also, the AT effect sound is output.

In the above example, the operation at timing (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. This operation shows the configuration of the counting notification A that the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Also, the operations at the timings (a4) and (a5) correspond to an example of the count notification B. FIG. In this operation, the configuration of the counting notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is output in some cases.

Next, the example of FIG. 98(b) shows the timing (b1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 100(b1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this situation, FIG. 100(b2) shows an example in which operation navigation is displayed at the timing (b2) after the first stop operation. Also, as shown in FIGS. 100(b2) to (b8), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as the value of "possessed", and in the upper right frame is obtained in the AT state. The total number of game medals played shall be displayed.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the counting button 171 is long-pressed after the first stop operation is performed and immediately after the start operation of the next game. FIG. 98(b) shows the operating period of the counting button 171. FIG. Timings (b3) to (b8) shown in FIG. 98(b) will be described in order below.

First, the timing (b3) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the first stop operation. At this timing (b3), the counting sound is not permitted, and the effect (including the AT effect sound) of FIG. 100(b2) continues as shown in FIG. 100(b3). When the counting button 171 is operated, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed. It is shown that the values of the numbers are starting to decrease.

The subsequent timing (b4) is the timing after the third stop operation and when the long press of the counting button 171 continues. FIG. 100(b4) shows how, at this timing (b4), an effect for winning a role (here, 8 game medals are won) is being executed. Note that the counting sound is not permitted at this timing (b4), and the AT effect sound is output. Then, by operating the count button 171, the characters "counting" are continuously displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b5) is the timing at which the counting sound is permitted while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time. At this timing (b5), the display of FIG. 100(b4) continues as shown in FIG. 100(b5), but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . By operating the count button 171, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (b6) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time. At this timing (b6), the display of FIG. 100(b4) continues as shown in FIG. 100(b6). Further, when the bet button 132 is operated, the counting sound permission period ends, and the output of the AT effect sound is resumed. By operating the counting button 171, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b7) is the timing after the start lever 135 is operated. At this timing (b7), the operation navigation is displayed as shown in FIG. 100(b7), and the AT production sound is output. By operating the counting button 171, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b8) is the timing when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (b8), the display of FIG. 100(b7) continues as shown in FIG. 100(b8). Also, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the AT production sound is being output. Note that the characters "counting" in the upper left frame of the screen have been erased.

In the above example, the operation at timing (b5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. This operation shows the configuration of the counting notification A that the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Also, the operation at the timings (b3) to (b5) corresponds to an example of the count notification B. FIG. In this operation, the configuration of the counting notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is output in some cases.

[About the display and effects based on the information from the medal number control section]
In this embodiment, the game medals in the game control unit 302 are controlled by the medal count control state command (see FIGS. 7 and 11) periodically transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 (every 5.9 to 8 ms in FIG. 7). Information such as number can be grasped (Fig. 25). Some of these pieces of information are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 by a security command (FIG. 7) periodically transmitted from the game controller 302 (every 100 ms in FIG. 7). The first sub-control unit 400 can perform various displays and effects control based on these pieces of information. Also, the player can grasp these information through these displays and effects.

Here, in the above configuration, the time to establish communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 when the power is turned on is the time required for communication between the game control unit 302 and the first sub-control unit 400 when the power is turned on. If it is later than the establishment time, the security command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 even though the medal number control state command from the medal number control unit 350 has not yet arrived at the game control unit 302. will be sent. Since the security command sent at this time does not reflect the information of the medal count control section 350, if various displays and effects are controlled based on the information included in this security command, the actual state will differ. Information will be given to the player.

In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, the security command may be transmitted from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 after the communication between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 is established. For example, the game control unit 302 may transmit the security command for the first time after the power is turned on after receiving the medal count control state command. Also, the security command may be transmitted after providing a sufficient waiting time.

In addition, until the communication between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 is established, even if the first sub-control unit 400 receives the security command, it may not execute processing based on the security command. For example, even if the first sub-controller 400 ignores security commands received several times after the power is turned on, or ignores security commands received until a certain standby time elapses, good.

Information indicating the communication state between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 is included in the security command, and the game control unit 302 receives the medal number control state command (the medal number control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 When communication is established), information indicating normal communication is included in the security command and transmitted, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes various displays and effect control on the condition that this information is included. It may be made possible. With this configuration, it is possible not to give the player information different from the actual state.

Here, a supplementary description of the operation from the transmission of the security command to the transmission of the next security command will be provided. For example, if information such as the number of game medals changes between security commands, and this information is not updated until the next security command is received, the latest information will not be reflected in various displays and effect control. put away. In the game control unit 302, various processing commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in accordance with the control related to the game (FIG. 7). By performing various displays and effects control, the latest information can be reflected.

<others>
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as games. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, rock-paper game machines, smart balls, etc., which are used as media.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains digitized data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

<<Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment>>
Configurations of the invention described in the above description will now be described with reference to corresponding configurations.

In the above description,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
The game control means, when the operation to the input operation means is performed during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means to when the response information is received, (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until a response command is received, [operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (insertion command transmission, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The input operation means includes a first input operation means (eg, 1 bet button 130) and a second input operation means (eg, MAX bet button 132) different from the first input operation means,
The game control means is
Based on the fact that the first insertion operation means has been operated, the gaming value number control means outputs the first insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command with a requested insertion number of one sheet) as the insertion operation information. send to
Second input operation information different from the first input operation information (for example, when the requested number of input sheets is 3 input command) to the game value number control means,
The game value number control means is
Based on the reception of the first input operation information, a first game value update process (for example, subtraction of the number of game medals from the number of requested insertions of one) is performed as the game value update process,
Based on the reception of the second input operation information, the game value update process is a second game value update process different from the first game value update process (e.g. subtraction),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means may not subtract the game value stored in the game value storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number reaches the maximum bet number). If it is, if the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 19),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400) for controlling effects performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game control means is
Based on the reception of the response information within a predetermined period of time after transmitting the input operation information, predetermined game information is output to the effect control means (for example, step S1114 in FIG. 17 ),
Means for outputting the predetermined game information to the effect control means even when the response information is not received within the predetermined period from the transmission of the input operation information (for example, , in FIG. 17, if the response command is not received, step S1114 is executed assuming that the response command is abnormal),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information ([operation of the game control unit 302 by the input operation (transmitting the input command, etc.)] description reference),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
The game control means, when the operation to the input operation means is performed during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means to when the response information is received, (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until a response command is received, [operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (insertion command transmission, etc.)]),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
The game control means, when the operation to the input operation means is performed during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means to when the response information is received, based on the operation (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until a response command is received, [operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (insertion command transmission, etc.)]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means includes counting processing (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The game value number control means is
Based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than the re-request) is transmitted to the game control means,
A means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([When receiving the input command operation]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device,
The game value number control means is
storing the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the transmission buffer and performing the game value update process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34);
When the input operation information is received while the game value number is stored in the transmission buffer in the counting process and the game value update process is performed, the second response information is sent to the game control means. is a means of transmitting
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means stores part of the game value stored in the game value storage means in the transmission buffer in one counting process, and It is a means for subtracting the part of the game value number (for example, since the maximum value of the number of counted at one time is 50 (step S4209 in FIG. 40), it may be part of the number of game medals) ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value number control means receives the input operation information from the end of one count process to the start of the next count process, the first response information to the game control means (for example, since the input prohibition flag is turned off, the response command is other than re-request),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means capable of retransmitting the input operation information transmitted immediately before to the game value number control means when receiving the second response information (for example, No determination in step S1310 of FIG. 19),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means does not perform the retransmission after the number of retransmissions reaches the upper limit number (for example, determination of No in step S1306 in FIG. 19), and the operation to the input operation means is performed (For example, step S1113 in FIG. 17 is not executed because the response result is abnormal),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means may not subtract the game value stored in the game value storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number reaches the maximum bet number). If it is, if the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the first response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 19),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a transmission process of the game value number to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) is a viable means of
The game value number control means is
Based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than the re-request) is transmitted to the game control means,
A means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([When receiving the input command operation]),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means counts (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means of
The game value number control means is
Based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than the re-request) is transmitted to the game control means,
A means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([When receiving the input command operation]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. While executing the game value update process for subtracting the requested number of insertions from the number of game values, the response information including information indicating that the number of requested insertions has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. 55 to FIG. 57, the determination of Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 57, the same value as the requested number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned by the response command),
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. Means for maintaining the number of game values and transmitting the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, modifications of FIGS. 55 to 57 , Steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 57 are both determined as No, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process of inputting the game value of the number of input requests is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55),
This is means for not performing the insertion process when the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 55, the insertion request number is not entered),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
As the input operation means, there is a maximum number input operation means (for example, MAX bet button 132),
The game control means, based on the fact that the maximum number insertion operation means is operated, the maximum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command to set the maximum number of bets as the requested number), which is the insertion operation information. means capable of transmitting to the game value number control means,
The game value number control means is a means for deriving the maximum number of game values that can be used in one game as the number of input requests based on the reception of the maximum number input operation information ([deformation for input operation Example] See),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The input operation information may include predetermined information (for example, information on input limit flag ON),
The requested input number derived based on the input operation information received is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, and the predetermined information is included in the input operation information. In this case, the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the game value number is maintained is transmitted to the game control means (for example, , modified examples of FIGS. 55 to 57, both steps S4604 and S4621 of FIG.
The requested number of inputs derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, and the predetermined information is not included in the input operation information. In this case, the game value updating process is executed to set the game value number stored in the game value number storage means to 0, and the response information including information indicating the game value number before becoming 0 is executed. to the game control means (for example, the modification of FIGS. 55 to 57, determination of No in step S4604 in FIG. 57, determination of Yes in S4621, all game medals are subtracted (becomes 0), the number of game medals before subtraction is returned as a subtraction by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating the game value number before reaching 0 is received, it is a means for performing an input process of inputting the game value of the game value number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55). ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
As the input operation means, there is a minimum number input operation means (for example, 1 bet button 130),
The game control means, based on the fact that the minimum number insertion operation means is operated, sets the minimum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command with a required number of 1) as the insertion operation information to the game value means capable of transmitting to the number control means,
The game value number control means is means for deriving the minimum number of game values that can be used in one game as the requested number of inputs, based on the reception of the minimum number input operation information,
The predetermined information is not included in the minimum number input operation information (for example, step S1122 in FIG. 55),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 19),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. While executing the game value update process for subtracting the requested number of insertions from the number of game values, the response information including information indicating that the number of requested insertions has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. 55 to FIG. 57, the determination of Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 57, the same value as the requested number of inserted game medals is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned as a response command),
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. Means for maintaining the number of game values and transmitting the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, modifications of FIGS. 55 to 57 , Steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 57 are determined as No, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintenance) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process of inputting the gaming value of the number of input requests is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55),
This is means for not performing the input processing when the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 55, the input request number is not entered),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. While executing the game value update process for subtracting the requested number of insertions from the number of game values, the response information including information indicating that the number of requested insertions has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. 55 to FIG. 57, the determination of Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 57, the same value as the requested number of inserted game medals is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned as a response command),
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. Means for maintaining the number of game values and transmitting the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, modifications of FIGS. 55 to 57 , Steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 57 are determined as No, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintenance) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process of inputting the gaming value of the number of input requests is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55),
This is means for not performing the input processing when the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 55, the input request number is not entered),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 18 step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The game value number control means includes counting processing (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle after the next time, Means for, when the settlement operation information is received during execution of one counting process, subjecting the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is counted after the next time. Become),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are continuously executed according to the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means, when receiving the settlement operation information during execution of the first counting process, stores the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information and the game value number storage. Means for summing the number of game values stored in the means and subjecting it to the second counting process,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means may not add the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the settlement operation information (for example, when the current bet number is 0). ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4705 in FIG. 46),
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 19),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 18 step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a transmission process of the game value number to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle after the next time, Means for, when the settlement operation information is received during execution of one counting process, subjecting the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is counted after the next time. Become),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 18 step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The game value number control means counts (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle after the next time, Means for, when the settlement operation information is received during execution of one counting process, subjecting the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is counted after the next time. Become),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The game value number control means includes counting processing (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle after the next time, When the payout information is received during execution of one counting process, the payout number derived based on the receipt of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time.) ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are continuously executed according to the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the game value number control means stores the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information and the game value number storage means. A means for summing up the game value numbers stored and subjecting them to the second counting process,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400) for controlling effects performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4B05 in FIG. 50),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the response information indicating that the game value update process based on the receipt of the payout information has been completed normally ( For example, step S1607 in FIG. 22),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see [operation of game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a transmission process of the game value number to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle after the next time, When the payout information is received during execution of one counting process, the payout number derived based on the receipt of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time.) ,
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The game value number control means counts (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle after the next time, When the payout information is received during execution of one counting process, the payout number derived based on the receipt of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time.) ,
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means derives the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server), and updates the game value based on the number of loans. means capable of processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 39),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. Means for maintaining the number (for example, judgment of No in step S4107 in FIG. 39, see [Lending notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
If the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a second value, the game value number control means controls the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4B03 in FIG. 50),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the second value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. means for maintaining the number (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 in FIG. 50),
The second value is a value greater than the first value (for example, step S4B03 in FIG. 50, step S4107 in FIG. 39),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The gaming value control means is means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value control means stores the response information in the transmission buffer when the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed the first value, and stores the response information in the transmission buffer. to the external processing device, the game value update process for adding the loan amount to the game value stored in the game value storage means can be executed after the transmission buffer is cleared. means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 36),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means updates the communication number with the external processing device (for example, , determination of Yes in step S3703 of FIG. 36, step S3706), sending the response information including the first information (for example, the rental serial number received this time) to the external processing device,
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means does not update the communication number with the external processing device ( For example, determination of No in step S3703 in FIG. 36, step S3706 is not executed), means for transmitting the response information including the second information (for example, the lending serial number received last time) to the external processing device ([ Refer to lending receipt result response (regular transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device;
The second information is the communication number received from the external processing device one before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 39),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. Means for maintaining the number (for example, judgment of No in step S4107 in FIG. 39, see [Lending notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 39),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. Means for maintaining the number (for example, judgment of No in step S4107 in FIG. 39, see [Lending notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means derives the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server), and updates the game value based on the number of loans. means capable of processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game means for executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the number of game values stored in the value number storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 36);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means counts (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means of
The game value number control means is means having a second transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device,
The game value number control means is a means for storing the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the second transmission buffer and performing the game value update process (for example, in FIG. 34). Steps S3513, S3514),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a predetermined value (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 39), the game value control means controls the external process. While updating the communication number with the device (for example, determination of Yes in step S3703 in FIG. 36, step S3706), the response information including the first information (for example, the rental serial number received this time) is sent to the external processing device means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loaned number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds the predetermined value (for example, determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 39), Without updating the communication number with the processing device (for example, determination of No in step S3703 in FIG. 36, step S3706 is not executed), the response information including the second information (for example, the lending serial number received last time) A means for transmitting to the external processing device and maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, determination of No in step S3712 in FIG. 36, S3714 is not executed),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device;
The second information is the communication number received from the external processing device immediately before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game medium management device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35),
The game value control means is means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the game medium management device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the game medium management device, the means for executing the game value update process for adding the number of loans to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 36);
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a gaming table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35),
The game value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game means for executing the game value update process for adding the number of loans to the number of game values stored in the value number storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 36);
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value, based on the operation of the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Provided with production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined production (for example, FIG. 63),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means, when power failure occurs while the counting promotion state is set, and when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored after that, the counting is performed. Means that can set the promotion state (for example, FIG. 68 (b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, Judgment of No in step S4211 of FIG.
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40). ) can be sent to the game media management device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) is sent to the game media management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms) as the game value number. sent repeatedly,
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent,
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value, based on the operation of the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to the first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 58). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 58);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 58) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent and
the second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operational state (Fig. 67);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second value may increase in degree according to the duration of the predetermined operation state (FIG. 67).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means, when power failure occurs while the counting promotion state is set, and when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored after that, the counting is performed. Means that can set the promotion state and maximize the degree of increase (Fig. 68 (b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Provided with production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined production (for example, FIG. 63),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value stored by the game value storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, the game value control means controls the game value stored by the game value storage means. is a means for reducing the degree of increase in the second value compared to the case where exceeds the predetermined value (FIG. 68(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to the first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 58). ) can be sent to the game media management device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 58);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 58) is sent to the game media management device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms) as the game value number. sent repeatedly,
the second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operational state (Fig. 67);
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to the first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 58). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 58);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 58) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent,
the second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operational state (Fig. 67);
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value, based on the operation of the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is canceled before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the game value number is set to the first value ( For example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 59) can be sent to the external processing device,
When the first time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step of FIG. 59). S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
Means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., two seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., Step S4234 in FIG. 59),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value as the game value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, determination of Yes in step S4235 in FIG. 59, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 69),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the automatic counting state is set, a notification means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) that performs predetermined notification (FIGS. 71 and 72),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Provided with production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined production (for example, FIG. 63),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means, when power failure occurs while the automatic counting state is set, and when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state when the power is restored after that, the automatic counting state is set. Means that can set the counting state (for example, FIG. 70(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for not setting the automatic counting state when the game value number stored by the game value number storage means is smaller than a predetermined value (FIG. 70(a)). ,
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is canceled before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the game value number is set to the first value ( For example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 59) can be sent to the game media management device,
When the first time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step of FIG. 59). S4209) can be sent to the game media management device,
Means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., two seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., Step S4234 in FIG. 59),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value as the game value number is repeatedly transmitted to the game medium management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (for example, determination of Yes in step S4235 in FIG. 59, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 69),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is canceled before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the game value number is set to the first value ( For example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 59) can be sent to the external processing device,
When the first time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step of FIG. 59). S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
Means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., two seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., Step S4234 in FIG. 59),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value as the game value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, determination of Yes in step S4235 in FIG. 59, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 69),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and processes the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
If the operation means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after power failure occurs, the game value control means sets the predetermined operation state as a valid operation state to the game value. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 73(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step of FIG. 40). S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent and
The game value number control means is in the predetermined operation state before the power failure when the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state since the power failure occurred and the power is restored thereafter. Means for determining the number of game values to be transmitted to the external processing device based on the time during which the predetermined operation state has been maintained after power is restored regardless of the time (FIG. 73(a));
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step of FIG. 40). S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent,
The gaming value number control means is means capable of setting the counting acceleration state when the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state since power failure occurred and the power was restored thereafter (Fig. 73(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Provided with production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined production (for example, FIG. 63),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
If the operation means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after power failure occurs, the game value control means sets the predetermined operation state as a valid operation state to the game value. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 73(a)),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
If the operating means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after power failure occurs, the game value control means sets the predetermined operation state as an effective operation state to the game value. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 73(a)),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, game medal number display device 170, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The display means, when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, displays a change in which the display value is changed stepwise from the value before update to the value after update. Means that can be done (e.g., FIGS. 76-80) are:
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The counting process is a process executed according to a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms),
The display means is means for performing the change display in a time period shorter than the predetermined period (FIGS. 76 and 77).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with operating means (eg, counting button 171),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the fact that the operation means is operated,
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) larger than the first value as the gaming value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined cycle,
The game value number control means is means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, Judgment of No in step S4211 of FIG.
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, game medal number display device 170, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The display means, when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, displays a change in which the display value is changed stepwise from the value before update to the value after update. Means that can be done (e.g., FIGS. 76-80) are:
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, game medal number display device 170, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The display means, when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, displays a change in which the display value is changed stepwise from the value before update to the value after update. Means that can be done (e.g., FIGS. 76-80) are:
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, FIG. 15). step S101),
The game value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 28),
The game control means does not clear the game information storage means when the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means when the game control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. (for example, determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 28),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Abnormalities in the game control means are reported with priority over abnormalities in the game value information control means (see [Operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value information control means is a means for transmitting information to the game control means at a predetermined cycle (for example, one command is transmitted at eight interrupts (0.745 ms×8)),
The game control means is a means for judging abnormal communication with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 24, [Action against error (game control Section 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [operation against error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal, the game value information control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, determination of No in step S3007 of FIG. 28 and step S4407 of FIG. 42, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, FIG. 15). step S101),
The game value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 28),
The game control means does not clear the game information storage means when the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means when the game control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. (for example, determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 28),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, FIG. 15). step S101),
The game value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 28),
The game control means does not clear the game information storage means when the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means when the game control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. (for example, determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 28),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game machine comprising
When the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means, the game control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Abnormalities in the game control means are notified with priority over abnormalities in the game value information control means (see [Actions against errors (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for determining abnormality in communication with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 24),
Abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [operation against error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal, the game value information control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, determination of No in step S3007 of FIG. 28 and step S4407 of FIG. 42, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to the state of the game and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
When the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means, the game control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to the state of the game and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
When the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means, the game control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the game control means and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the payout information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 of FIG. 50, response command is set to "abnormal"),
Based on the reception of the predetermined information, the game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 22),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. )〕reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of disabling the progress of the game when the predetermined information is received (for example, in step S1606 of FIG. 22, the determination is No and the process is repeated. [Game control by payout Operation of unit 302 (transmission of payout command, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (eg, counting button 171),
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value number based on the fact that the counting operation means is operated. means capable of executing the game value update process for subtracting the number (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The production control means is means for causing the production means to perform background display,
The predetermined effect is a effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 81(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the game control means and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the payout information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 of FIG. 50, response command is set to "abnormal"),
Based on the reception of the predetermined information, the game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 22),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. )〕reference),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a gaming table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the game control means and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the payout information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 of FIG. 50, response command is set to "abnormal"),
Based on the reception of the predetermined information, the game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 22),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. )〕reference),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
Game value number control means (for example, , medal number control unit 350),
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. is a means of sending a
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information,
The effect control means is means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modification of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur for borrowing exceeding the upper limit),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of causing the effect means to perform a demonstration effect when the game is not being executed,
The predetermined effect is a effect that is performed even when the demonstration effect is being performed (for example, FIG. 84 (a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (eg, counting button 171),
The game value number control means performs the process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the fact that the counting operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The production control means is means for causing the production means to perform background display,
The predetermined effect is a effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 81(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that bi-directionally communicates with the game medium management device and performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means; ,
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. is a means of sending a
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information,
The effect control means is means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modification of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur for borrowing exceeding the upper limit),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, a medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the external processing device and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. is a means of sending
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information,
The effect control means is means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modification of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur for borrowing exceeding the upper limit),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
An amusement machine equipped with main control means (e.g., main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with an external processing device (e.g., lending machine 700, host server) to progress a game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The main control means is means for determining abnormality in communication with the external processing device from the state of a predetermined signal (for example, VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game if the communication abnormality is determined (for example, determination of No in step S1007 of FIG. 16),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
One-way communication with the main control means, effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) ),
The effect control means is a means that does not notify the communication abnormality in the effect means when the communication abnormality is determined (for example, does not execute error notification for the VL signal abnormality).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
One-way communication with the main control means, effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) ),
Equipped with counting operation means (eg, counting button 171),
The main control means executes a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the fact that the counting operation means is operated. possible means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The production control means is means for causing the production means to perform background display,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 81(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A gaming machine comprising main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the game medium management device and progresses a game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The main control means is means for determining abnormality in communication with the game media management device from the state of a predetermined signal (for example, VL signal) transmitted from the game media management device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game if the communication abnormality is determined (for example, determination of No in step S1007 in FIG. 16),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A gaming machine comprising main control means (e.g., main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the external processing device and progresses the game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The main control means is means for determining abnormality in communication with the external processing device from the state of a predetermined signal (e.g., VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game if the communication abnormality is determined (for example, determination of No in step S1007 in FIG. 16),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
counting operation means (eg, counting button 171);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game table comprising
The game value control means performs counting processing (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (for example, AT state) in which an auxiliary function that is advantageous to the player can be operated,
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the counting operation means even in the first gaming state,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing a counting effect (for example, FIG. 63) accompanying the counting process,
The amount of increase in the game value number per unit game in the first game state when the game is advanced according to the activated auxiliary function is greater than the amount of decrease in the game value number per unit game by the counting process. Small (In the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting process], the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous game state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing different configurations),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The counting effect is a effect provided with an end condition that is different from the end of the counting process. configuration that may terminate),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a specific production,
The production control means is means for not executing the specific production during execution of the counting production,
A game machine characterized by (see the configuration that does not execute an effect that requires some operation in the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The specific effect is a effect that requires a player's operation,
A game machine characterized by (see the configuration that does not execute an effect that requires some operation in the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The counting effect is a effect whose content changes according to the amount of subtraction of the game value number by the counting process.
(See the configuration in which the content of the counting effect changes according to the amount of game medals counted in the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting process]). there is

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means for restarting the immediately preceding counting effect from the middle when the counting process is started again within a predetermined time after the counting effect ends in the middle due to the end of the counting process. is
During the description of the game machine ([Regarding the difference between payout and counting process], even after the counting effect has ended in the middle, the immediately preceding counting effect (counting effect that ended in the middle ) is resumed from the middle)).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means continues the counting effect within a predetermined time after the counting process ends, and when the counting process is newly started while the counting effect is continuing, the counting effect is executed. It is a means of continuous execution,
During the description of the game machine ([Regarding the difference between payout and counting process], the counting effect continues even after the counting process is completed, and when a new counting process is started, the counting effect being executed is maintained as it is), is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used for setting the number of bets;
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting first information (e.g., settlement command) regarding settlement to the game value number control means, based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The game value number control means derives the settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the first information, performs the game value update process based on the settlement number, and then updates the game value with respect to the first information. A means for not transmitting response information to the game control means,
The game control means is means capable of setting the number of bets to 0 based on the fact that the adjustment operation means is operated.
A game machine characterized by this (see configuration that does not wait for a response command to a settlement command (response command not used)).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting second information (for example, an input command) regarding the input to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated,
The game value number control means derives the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the second information, and performs the game value update process based on the input request number. A means capable of transmitting response information to the information to the game control means,
The game control means is means capable of setting the number of bets based on the reception of response information to the second information,
(For the input command, see the configuration using the response command).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game value control means, if there is an increase in the game value while the counting process is continued, controls the game value obtained by subtracting the increase in the game value from the external processing device. , the increased game value is transmitted to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing]. See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game value control means, if there is an increase in the game value while the counting process is continued, controls the game value obtained by subtracting the increase in the game value from the external processing device. , the increased game value is transmitted to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing]. See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means controls the increment of the game value while the counting process continues before the game value becomes 0 and after the counting process ends. (Refer to the operation when the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Regarding the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
with
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 18 step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The above-mentioned increment is based on the above-mentioned settlement number (in the description of [Concerning the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], either payout or settlement operation is targeted as the increase in the number of game medals. configuration reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The increment is based on the number of payouts. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game value control means, if there is an increase in the game value while the counting process is continued, controls the game value obtained by subtracting the increase in the game value from the external processing device. after transmitting the increased game value to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing], the maximum See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the game value number for each fixed number to the external processing device at a transmission timing that periodically visits (for example, transmission of the number of game medals by counting processing (count notification ) every 300 ms, Fig. 5),
When the game value number control means terminates the transmission of the game value number excluding the increased game value number at the current transmission timing out of the transmission timings, the game value control means Means for transmitting the increased game value number at the transmission timing (in FIGS. 91(c) and (e), after transmission of 120 game medals at the time of counting processing is completed first, the increased amount is is sent.),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means controls the increment of the game value while the counting process continues before the game value becomes 0 and after the counting process ends. (Refer to the operation when the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Regarding the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
with
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 18 step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The above-mentioned increment is based on the above-mentioned settlement number (in the description of [Concerning the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], either payout or settlement operation is targeted as the increase in the number of game medals. configuration reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The increment is based on the number of payouts. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, effect image display device 157, game medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game value control means, if there is an increase in the game value while the counting process is continued, controls the game value obtained by subtracting the increase in the game value from the external processing device. after transmitting the increased game value to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing], the maximum See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
The display means is means capable of performing subtraction display for subtracting the game value number in accordance with the game value number subtracted by the counting process,
The display means is means capable of executing the subtraction display reflecting the increase when there is an increase in the game value while the counting process continues (FIG. 91(d) ( f)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means controls the increment of the game value while the counting process continues before the game value becomes 0 and after the counting process ends. (Refer to the operation when the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Regarding the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
with
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 18 step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The above-mentioned increment is based on the above-mentioned settlement number (in the description of [Concerning the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], either payout or settlement operation is targeted as the increase in the number of game medals. configuration reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The increment is based on the number of payouts. configuration reference),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used for setting the number of bets;
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The input operation means includes predetermined input operation means (for example, bet button 130) capable of setting the minimum bet amount,
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the fact that the predetermined input operation means is operated in a state in which the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and can transmit information on the difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process based on the reception of the settlement information.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means determines a value obtained by subtracting the minimum value from the maximum value based on the fact that the predetermined insertion operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value. a means for transmitting the settlement information including the game value number control means,
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
including audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277),
The voice output means is means for outputting a settlement sound based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The sound output means is means for outputting an input sound based on the fact that the input operation means is operated,
The sound output means is means for outputting the throwing sound based on the predetermined throwing operation means being operated in a state where the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine ((see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation])) characterized by

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used for setting the number of bets;
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
audio output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The input operation means includes predetermined input operation means (for example, bet button 130) capable of setting the minimum bet amount,
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement information to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the fact that the predetermined input operation means is operated in a state in which the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and can transmit information on the difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process based on the reception of the settlement information,
The voice output means is means for outputting a settlement sound based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The voice output means is means for not outputting the settlement sound when the predetermined input operation means is operated in a state in which the bet amount is set to a value different from the minimum value. ,
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The sound output means is means for outputting an input sound based on the fact that the input operation means is operated,
The sound output means is means for outputting the throwing sound based on the predetermined throwing operation means being operated in a state where the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the game control means when external information relating to the game value managed by the external processing device is received,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect corresponding to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is the sum of the number included in the external information and the number of game values,
(Refer to the configuration for determining the total value of the number of game medals and the number of possessed medals in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals]).

again,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the game control means when external information relating to the game value managed by the external processing device is received,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect corresponding to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is a number included in the external information,
(Refer to the configuration for determining the number of possessed medals in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The number included in the external information is the number of stored game values acquired in the game (for example, the number of owned medals is the stored game value acquired in the game),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means executes a first effect when the number of determination objects has not reached a predetermined number, and executes a second effect based on the fact that the number of determination objects has reached the predetermined number. (Refer to the configuration for executing different effects according to the number of game medals in the description of [Production according to the number of game medals]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means capable of displaying information about the determination target at least in the certain game state (in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals], the value to be the determination target is displayed. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the number of game values acquired in the certain game state (in the description of [Production according to the number of game medals], (Refer to the configuration in which the production using the number of medals held and the production using the number of medals earned are executed in parallel),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In the certain game state, the number of game values acquired in the certain game state may exceed the number contained in the external information ("Player If the counting process is not executed in a state that is advantageous to the player, the number of medals won may exceed the number of medals you have"),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect according to the determination target ([Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals] "When the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, the set value is changed. The suggested display may be executed”),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The effect control means is means capable of displaying the number of game values in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the value of "possessed" in FIG. 93),
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect in accordance with the number of acquired game values in the certain game state,
(In the description of [Production according to the number of game medals], a configuration for determining the number of won medals in the AT state, see FIG. 93) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means capable of displaying the number of acquired game values in the certain game state (for example, the value of "... GET" in FIG. 93),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means for updating and displaying both the display of the obtained number and the display of the number of game values when a game value is obtained in the certain game state (for example, FIG. 93 (d2) (d3)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means capable of executing effects corresponding to the number of game values in the certain game state. configuration reference),
A game machine characterized by:

A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
a first operating means (for example, a reset button R);
a second operating means (eg, count button 171);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
The second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error related to the game value number control means,
when the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error is resolvable and the second error is irresolvable;
A game machine (see the description of [About the operation at the time of error duplication], FIG. 96) characterized by the following is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 95),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process (see FIG. 94),
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 94).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operating means (see FIG. 94),
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error has occurred (see FIG. 96);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means is the same operating means as the second operating means,
A gaming machine characterized by the there is

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
a first operating means (for example, a reset button R);
a second operating means (eg, count button 171);
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
The second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error related to the game value number control means,
When the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error is resolvable and the second error becomes the non-resolvable first state. ,
The notification means is means capable of executing a first error notification regarding the first error in the first state,
A game machine (see the description of [About the operation at the time of error duplication], FIG. 96) characterized by the following is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification prompting cancellation of the first error based on the operation of the second operation means in the first state (see FIG. 96(d4). ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means capable of executing a second error notification (see FIG. 96 (d2)) regarding the second error.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means for interrupting the second error notification that has been executed when executing the first error notification in the first state (see FIGS. 96(d2) and (d3)),
The notification means is means for starting the second error notification when the first state ends due to cancellation of the first error (see FIGS. 96(d4) to (d6)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means for continuously executing the second error notification when executing the first error notification in the first state (in the description of [Regarding the operation at the time of error duplication], (see configuration to display messages about both errors),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
the second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process;
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means.
A gaming machine (see FIGS. 94(b2) to (b4)) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 95),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operating means (see FIG. 94),
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error has occurred (see FIG. 96);
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
audio output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (for example, AT state) advantageous to the player,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an AT state effect sound) in the first game state,
The sound output means is means for reducing the volume of the first effect sound when the counting process is being executed in the first game state.
A gaming machine (see [Regarding notification of counting process (1)]) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means may reduce the volume of the first effect sound when the counting process is executed in the first gaming state in which all of the plurality of reels are stopped. is a means of
(See the configuration for executing count notification A in a state where all reels are stopped in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The voice output means, in the first gaming state, when the counting process is being executed after a predetermined time has passed since all of the spinning reels have been stopped. A means by which the volume of the first effect sound may be reduced,
During the description of the gaming machine ([Regarding counting process notification (1)], a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation was performed on the reels, and all the reels have stopped rotating. (See configuration for executing count notification A on the condition of ), is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The sound output means is means capable of outputting a second effect sound (e.g., counting sound) when the counting process is being executed.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
The audio output means is means for returning the volume of the first effect sound based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in a state where the volume of the first effect sound is reduced.
(See the configuration for ending the count notification A being executed upon operation of some operating means in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420) including the audio output means;
with
The game control means is a means capable of setting a second game state (for example, normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state,
The production means is a means capable of executing a demonstration production,
The effect means is means for not executing a demonstration effect when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the first gaming state,
The effect means is means capable of executing a demonstration effect when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the second gaming state.
During the description of the amusement machine ([Regarding counting process notification (1)], a so-called demonstration effect is not executed in a state that is advantageous to the player, and a demo effect is executed in a state that is disadvantageous to the player. , see the description), is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
audio output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (for example, AT state) advantageous to the player,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an AT state effect sound) in the first game state,
The sound output means is means capable of outputting a second effect sound (e.g., counting sound) when the counting process is being executed,
The sound output means is means for maintaining a state in which the first effect sound is being output when the counting process is being executed in the first game state.
A gaming machine (see [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means is means for outputting the second effect sound when the counting process is being executed while all of the plurality of reels in the first gaming state are stopped. be,
(See the configuration for executing count notification B in a state where all reels are stopped in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (2)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means is means for not outputting the second effect sound while any one of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state.
(Refer to the configuration in which count notification B is not executed while any reel is rotating in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (2)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
predetermined operating means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
with
The sound output means is means for not outputting the second effect sound during a period from when the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until the plurality of reels start rotating.
(Refer to the configuration that does not execute count notification B after some operation means is performed in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (2)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means outputs the second effect sound in the first mode when the counting process is being executed while all of the plurality of reels in the first gaming state are stopped. is sometimes a means of
In the description of the game machine ([Regarding the counting process notification (2)], the case where the count notification B is executed is the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting notification B is not executed is When outputting the counting sound of the second aspect, refer to the configuration where each is read as).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means outputs the second effect sound in the second mode when the counting process is being executed while any one of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state. is a means of outputting
In the description of the game machine ([Regarding the counting process notification (2)], the case where the count notification B is executed is the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting notification B is not executed is When outputting the counting sound of the second aspect, refer to the configuration where each is read as).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
with
The voice output means outputs the second is a means for outputting the effect sound of in a second mode,
In the description of the game machine ([Regarding the counting process notification (2)], the case where the count notification B is executed is the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting notification B is not executed is When outputting the counting sound of the second aspect, refer to the configuration where each is read as).

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means for transmitting information on the game value number to the game control means,
The game control means is means for transmitting a command (for example, a security command) including information on the game value number received from the game value number control means to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means for executing a first control related to the game value number based on the reception of the command.
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the effect control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established,
The effect control means is means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until communication is established between the game control means and the game value number control means.
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the effect control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established,
The command includes information indicating whether communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal,
The effect control means is means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until information indicating that the communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal is received. be,
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means for executing the first control based on normal communication between the game control means and the game value number control means.
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting the command to the effect control means at a predetermined period (for example, a security command is transmitted at a period of 100 ms),
The game control means transmits various processing commands (for example, various processing commands in FIG. 5) including information on the game value number received from the game value number control means to the effect control means in accordance with the progress of the game. is a means to
The effect control means is a means for executing the first control based on the reception of the various processing commands,
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

100 slot machine 110-112 reel 113 display windows 130, 132 bet button 134 checkout button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 157 effect image display device 171 counting buttons 272, 277 speaker 420 various lamps 302 game control section 350 medal number control section 400 first sub-controller 500 second sub-controller 700 lending machine 707 lending button 800 hall management terminal 810 intermediate management terminal 820 management server

Claims (2)

a throwing operation means;
counting operating means;
a game control means for controlling the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means for storing a game value number related to the game value used in the game;
a game value control means for performing a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
Production control means for controlling the production performed by the production means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means executes a counting process including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the counting operation means. is a possible means,
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state in which an auxiliary function that is advantageous to the player can be operated,
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the counting operation means even in the first gaming state,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a counting production along with the counting process,
The amount of increase in the game value number per unit game in the first game state when the game is advanced according to the activated auxiliary function is greater than the amount of decrease in the game value number per unit game by the counting process. small ,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a specific production,
The production control means is means for not executing the specific production during execution of the counting production,
A playground characterized by: a throwing operation means;
counting operating means;
a game control means for controlling the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means for storing a game value number related to the game value used in the game;
a game value control means for performing a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
Production control means for controlling the production performed by the production means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means executes a counting process including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the counting operation means. is a possible means,
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state in which an auxiliary function that is advantageous to the player can be operated,
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the counting operation means even in the first gaming state,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a counting production along with the counting process,
The amount of increase in the game value number per unit game in the first game state when the game is advanced according to the activated auxiliary function is greater than the amount of decrease in the game value number per unit game by the counting process. small,
The counting effect is a effect whose content changes according to the amount of subtraction of the game value number by the counting process,
The effect control means continues the counting effect within a predetermined time after the counting process ends, and when the counting process is newly started while the counting effect is continuing, the counting effect is executed. is a means of continuing to perform,
A playground characterized by:

Images